Programming Code Compatibility Suite Guide Option 266

Programming Code Compatibility Suite Guide Option 266
Programming Code Compatibility
Suite Guide Option 266
Agilent Technologies
PSA Spectrum Analyzers
This manual provides documentation for the following instruments
with Option 266 Installed:
PSA Series
E4440A (3 Hz - 26.5 GHz)
E4443A (3 Hz - 6.7 GHz)
E4445A (3 Hz - 13.2 GHz)
E4446A (3 Hz - 44.0 GHz)
E4447A (3 Hz - 42.98 GHz)
E4448A (3 Hz - 50.0 GHz)
Manufacturing Part Number: E4440-90628
Supersedes: E4440-90352
Printed in USA
June 2008
© Copyright 2001 – 2008 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change
without notice.
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this
material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent
Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for
incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing,
performance, or use of this material.
Where to Find the Latest Information
Documentation is updated periodically. For the latest information about
Agilent PSA Spectrum Analyzers, including firmware upgrades,
software upgrades, application information, and product information,
please visit the Internet URL listed below:
http://www.agilent.com/find/psa
2
Contents
Getting Started
Option 266 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 266 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for Option 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Option 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Optional Measurement Personalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Option 266 on PSA Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu - PSA Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation for Option 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Analyzers with Option 266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Analyzer Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
1.
26
26
28
30
30
37
40
45
47
48
48
48
2.
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.
Hints and Tips
A Few Helpful Hints and Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.
Programming Commands
Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 [three]
View Mode for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4 [four]
Blank Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACP
Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACPALPHA
Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACPALTCH
86
88
89
89
89
90
90
90
91
91
91
92
92
92
93
93
93
94
94
94
3
Table of Contents
Contents
Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
ACPBRPER
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
ACPBRWID
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
ACPBW
Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
ACPCOMPUTE
Adjacent Channel Power Compute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
ACPLOWER
Lower Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
ACPMAX
Maximum Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
ACPMEAS
Measure Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
ACPPAR
Adjacent Channel Power Manual or Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
ACPPWRTX
Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
4
Contents
107
108
108
108
109
109
109
110
110
110
111
111
111
112
112
112
113
113
113
115
115
115
116
116
116
117
117
118
119
119
119
121
121
121
123
123
123
5
Table of Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACPSP
Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACPT
Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACPUPPER
Upper Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADJALL
LO and IF Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMB
A minus B into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMBPL
(A minus B) plus Display Line into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANNOT
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APB
Trace A Plus Trace B to A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT
Input Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUNITS
Absolute Amplitude Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO
Auto Couple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOCPL
Auto Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
AXB
Exchange Trace A and Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
B1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
B2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
B3 [three]
View Mode for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
B4 [four]
Blank Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
BL
Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
BLANK
Blank Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
BML
Trace B Minus Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
BTC
Transfer Trace B to Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
BXC
Exchange Trace B and Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
C1 [one]
Set A Minus B Mode Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
C2 [two]
A Minus B Into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
CA
6
Contents
136
136
136
137
137
137
138
138
138
139
139
139
140
140
140
141
141
141
142
142
142
143
143
143
144
144
144
145
145
145
146
146
146
147
147
147
148
7
Table of Contents
Couple Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CARRON
Carrier On Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CF
Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL
Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANPWR
Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHP
Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHPWRBW
Channel Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLRAVG
Clear Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLRW
Clear Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLS
Clear Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTS
Continuous Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CORREK
Correction Factors On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
COUPLE
Input Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
CR
Couple Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
CS
Couple Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
CT
Couple Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
CV
Couple Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
DA
Display Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
DELMKBW
Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
DET
Detection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
DL
Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
DLE
Display Line Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
DLYSWP
Delay Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
DONE
Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
8
Contents
162
163
163
163
164
164
164
165
165
165
166
166
166
167
167
167
168
168
168
169
169
169
170
170
170
171
171
171
172
172
172
173
173
173
174
174
174
9
Table of Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1[one]
Peak Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 [two]
Marker to Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3 [three]
Delta Marker Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E4 [four]
Marker to Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITDONE
End of Limit Line Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITLIML
Edit Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERR
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ET
Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EX
Exchange Trace A and Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FA
Start Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FB
Stop Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDSP
Frequency Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
FOFFSET
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
FPKA
Fast Preselector Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
FREF
Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
FS
Full Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
GRAT
Graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
HD
Hold Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
I1 [one]
Set RF Coupling to DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
I2 [two]
Set RF Coupling to AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
ID
Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
IP
Instrument Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
KS,
Mixer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
KS=
Marker Counter Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
KSA
10
Contents
188
188
188
189
189
189
190
190
190
191
191
191
192
192
192
193
193
193
194
194
194
195
195
195
196
196
196
197
197
197
198
198
198
199
199
199
200
11
Table of Contents
Amplitude in dBm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSa
Normal Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSB
Amplitude in dBmV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSb
Positive Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSC
Amplitude in dBuV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSc
A Plus B to A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSD
Amplitude in Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSd
Negative Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSE
Title Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSe
Sample Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSG
Video Averaging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSg
Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSH
Video Averaging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
KSh
Display On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
KSI
Extend Analyzer Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
KSi
Exchange Trace B and Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
KSj
View Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
KSK
Marker to Next Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
KSk
Blank Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
KSL
Marker Noise Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
KSl
Transfer Trace B to Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
KSM
Marker Noise On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
KSm
Graticule Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
KSN
Marker Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
KSn
Graticule On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
12
Contents
213
214
214
214
215
215
215
216
216
216
217
217
217
218
218
218
219
219
219
220
220
220
221
221
221
222
222
222
223
223
223
224
224
224
226
226
226
13
Table of Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSO
Marker Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSo
Annotation Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSp
Annotation On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KST
Fast Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSV
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSx
External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSy
Video Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSZ
Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L0 [zero]
Display Line Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LF
Low Frequency Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG
Logarithmic Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMD
Limit Line Delta Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
LIMF
Limit Line Frequency Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
LIMIDEL
Delete Limit Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
LIMIDISP
Limit Line Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
LIMIFAIL
Limits Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
LIMIFT
Select Frequency or Time Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
LIMIPURGE
Delete Current Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
LIMIREL
Relative Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
LIMITEST
Enable Limit Line Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
LIML
Lower-Limit Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
LIMM
Limit Middle-Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
LIMU
Upper-Limit Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
LN
Linear Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
LSPAN
14
Contents
239
239
239
240
240
240
241
241
241
242
242
242
244
244
244
245
245
245
246
246
246
247
247
247
248
248
248
249
249
249
250
250
250
251
251
251
252
15
Table of Contents
Previous Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M1 [one]
Marker Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2 [two]
Marker Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3 [three]
Delta Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M4 [four]
Marker Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MA
Marker Amplitude Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MC0 [zero]
Marker Frequency Counter Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MC1 [one]
Marker Frequency Counter On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDS
Measurement Data Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEAN
Trace Mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEANPWR
Mean Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASOFF
Measurement Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MF
Marker Frequency Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
MINH
Minimum Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
MINPOS
Minimum X Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
MKA
Marker Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
MKACT
Activate Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
MKBW
Marker Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
MKCF
Marker to Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
MKD
Marker Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
MKF
Marker Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
MKFC
Marker Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
MKFCR
Marker Counter Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
MKMIN
Marker Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
MKN
Marker Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
16
Contents
265
266
266
266
268
268
268
269
269
269
270
270
270
271
271
271
272
272
272
273
273
273
275
275
275
276
276
276
277
277
277
278
278
278
279
279
279
17
Table of Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKNOISE
Marker Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKOFF
Marker Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKP
Marker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKPK
Marker Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKPT
Marker Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKPX
Marker Peak Excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKREAD
Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKRL
Marker to Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKSP
Marker to Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKSS
Marker to Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKT
Marker Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKTBL
Marker Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
MKTRACE
Marker Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
MKTRACK
Marker Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
MKTYPE
Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
ML
Mixer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
MT0 [zero]
Marker Track Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
MT1 [one]
Marker Track On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
MXMH
Maximum Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
O1 [one]
Format - Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
O2 [two]
Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
O3 [three]
Format - Real Amplitude Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
O4 [four]
Format - One 8-Bit Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
OCCUP
Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
OL
18
Contents
293
293
293
294
294
294
295
295
295
296
296
296
297
297
297
298
298
298
299
299
299
300
300
300
301
301
301
302
302
302
303
303
303
304
304
304
305
19
Table of Contents
Output Learn String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OT
Output Trace Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEAKS
Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PKPOS
Peak Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLOT
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PP
Preselector Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREAMPG
External Preamplifier Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWRBW
Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWRUPTIME
Power Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q0 [zero]
EMI Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q1 [one]
Quasi-Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R1 [one]
Illegal Command SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
R2 [two]
End-of-Sweep SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
R3 [three]
Hardware Broken SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
R4 [four]
Units-Key-Pressed SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
RB
Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
RBR
Resolution Bandwidth Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
RC
Recall State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
RCLS
Recall State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
REV
Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
RL
Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
RMS
Root Mean Square Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
ROFFSET
Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
RQS
Service Request Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
20
Contents
319
320
320
320
321
321
321
322
322
322
323
323
323
324
324
324
325
325
325
326
326
326
327
327
327
328
328
328
329
329
329
330
330
330
331
331
331
21
Table of Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S1[one]
Continuous Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S2 [two]
Single Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SADD
Add Limit Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVES
Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDEL
Delete Limit Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDON
Terminate Limit Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEDI
Activate Limit Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENTER
Segment Entry for Frequency Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SER
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETDATE
Set Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTIME
Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMOOTH
Smooth Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
SNGLS
Single Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
SP
Frequency Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
SRQ
User-Defined SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
SS
Center Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
ST
Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
STB
Status Byte Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
STDEV
Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
SUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
SV
Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
T1 [one]
Free Run Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
T2 [two]
Line Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
T3 [three]
External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
T4 [four]
Video Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
22
Contents
347
347
348
348
348
349
349
349
350
350
350
351
351
351
352
352
352
353
353
353
354
354
354
355
355
355
356
356
356
357
357
357
358
358
358
359
359
23
Table of Contents
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TA
Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TB
Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDF
Trace Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TH
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMEDATE
Time Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TITLE
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TM
Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRA
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRB
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRC
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRDSP
Trace Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGPOL
Trigger Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Contents
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
TRPRST
Trace Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
TRSTAT
Trace State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
TS
Take Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
VAVG
Video Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
VB
Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
VBO
Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
VBR
Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
VIEW
View Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
VTL
Video Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
XCH
Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
5.
24
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Command Keywords and Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Creating Valid Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Special Characters in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Parameters in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Getting Started
1
Getting Started
25
Getting Started
Option 266 Description
Option 266 Description
Option 266 (PSA Series Programming Code Compatibility Suite) for
Agilent Technologies’ PSA series of spectrum analyzers allows the
analyzer to be controlled using many of the remote programming
commands from the following analyzers:
• 8560 E/EC Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising:
Getting Started
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8560E
8560EC
8561E
8561EC
8562E
8562EC
8563E
8563EC
8564E
8564EC
8565E
8565EC
• 8566A/B
• 8568A/B
• 8590 E/L Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NOTE
8590L
8591E
8592L
8593E
8594E
8594L
8595E
8596E
The 8566A/B and the 8568A/B are not considered part of the 8560
series of analyzers.
Option 266 is designed to replace these analyzers in many automated
systems with minimal or no modification to the currently used
measurement software.
Option 266 Limitations
The Agilent Option 266 (PSA Series Programming Code Compatibility
Suite) has been designed to emulate as closely as possible the operation
of the specified spectrum analyzers. It is not, however, intended as an
absolute direct replacement for these analyzers.
26
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Option 266 Description
Supported commands
Only a subset of the 8566/8568/8560 Series/8590 Series commands is
supported in this option (through a GPIB interface). These supported
commands were determined by feedback from our customers combined
with technical considerations and constraints.
Predefined Functions
In the 8566/8568/8560 Series/8590 Series analyzers, a “predefined
function” is an analyzer command that returns a number that can be
operated on by other analyzer commands. “Predefined variables” follow
the same idea, except the value to be passed as a parameter to the next
command is stored in a variable.
Getting Started
Option 266 does not support this type of behavior, so any commands
that originally acted as predefined functions or variables, or that
allowed predefined functions or variables as arguments in the
8566/8568/8560 Series/8590 Series analyzers, will no longer do so.
User-defined Functions
No user-defined functions, traces, or variables (FUNCDEF, TRDEF or
VARDEF) can be used as arguments or commands in programs
controlling any analyzer running Option 266. In addition, the behavior
of certain commands that rely on the “active functions” (UP, DN, etc.)
may be slightly different.
Chapter 1
27
Getting Started
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for Option 266
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for
Option 266
One of the following Agilent spectrum analyzers and associated
hardware options is required to run Option 266.
Getting Started
Table 1-1
Compatible Agilent PSA Series Spectrum Analyzers
Analyzer
Model
Number
Upper
Frequency
Limit
Firmware
PSA Series
Programming Code
Compatibility
Suite Personality
E4440A
26.5 GHz
A.10.00 or later
Option 266
E4443A
6.7 GHz
A.10.00 or later
Option 266
E4445A
13.2 GHz
A.10.00 or later
Option 266
E4446A
44.0 GHz
A.10.00 or later
Option 266
E4447A
42.98 GHz
A.10.00 or later
Option 266
E4448A
50.0 GHz
A.10.00 or later
Option 266
For maximum compatibility, you should select a PSA Series analyzer
that best matches the frequency range of your chosen remote language.
The frequency limits of the remote languages are listed below.
Table 1-2
Frequency Ranges of the Remote Languages
Remote Language
Start Frequency
Stop Frequencya
8560E/EC
0 Hz
2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz
6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz
13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz
26.5 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz
40.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz
50.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz
22.0 GHz
8566B
0 Hz
22.0 GHz
8568A
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
8590L
0 Hz
1.8 GHz
8591E
0 Hz
1.8 GHz
28
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for Option 266
Table 1-2
Frequency Ranges of the Remote Languages
Remote Language
Start Frequency
Stop Frequencya
8592Lb
0 Hz
22.0 GHz
8593Eb
0 Hz
22.0 GHz
8594E
0 Hz
2.9 GHz
8595E
0 Hz
6.5 GHz
8596Eb
0 Hz
12.8 GHz
a. Or the upper frequency range of the PSA (whichever one is lower).
Chapter 1
Getting Started
For example, the E4445A will only have a stop frequency of
13.2 GHz when emulating an 8563E/EC.
b. The command HNLOCK (Harmonic Lock) is not supported in Option
266. Thus, the different frequency spans associated with the various
harmonic bands are also not supported.
29
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
Installing Option 266
You must load the desired personality option into the instrument
memory. Loading can be done from a firmware CD-ROM or from the
internet location. An automatic loading program comes with the files
and runs from your PC.
Installing Optional Measurement Personalities
Getting Started
When you install a measurement personality, you need to follow a three
step process:
1. Determine whether your memory capacity is sufficient to contain all
the options you want to load. If not, decide which options you want to
install now, and consider upgrading your memory. Details follow in
“Do You Have Enough Memory to Load All Your Personality
Options?” on page 1-30.
2. Install the measurement personality firmware into the instrument
memory. Details follow in “Loading an Optional Measurement
Personality” on page 34.
3. Enter a license key that activates the measurement personality.
Details follow in “Obtaining and Installing a License Key” on
page 34.
Adding measurement personalities requires the purchase of an upgrade
kit for the desired option. The upgrade kit contains the measurement
personality firmware and an entitlement certificate that is used to
generate a license key from the internet website. A separate license key
is required for each option on a specific instrument serial number and
host ID.
For the latest information on Agilent Spectrum Analyzer options and
upgrade kits, visit the following web location:
http://www.agilent.com/find/sa_upgrades
Do You Have Enough Memory to Load All Your Personality
Options?
If you do not have memory limitations then you can skip ahead to the
next section “Loading an Optional Measurement Personality” on
page 1-34. If after installing your options you get error messages
relating to memory issues, you can return to this section to learn more
about how to optimize your configuration.
If you have 64 MBytes of memory installed in your instrument, you
should have enough memory to install at least four optional
personalities, with plenty of memory for data and states.
The optional measurement personalities require different amounts of
memory. So the number of personalities that you can load varies. This is
30
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
also impacted by how much data you need to save. If you are having
memory errors you must swap the applications in or out of memory as
needed. If you only have 48 MBytes of memory, you can upgrade your
hardware to 64 MBytes.
Additional memory can be added to any PSA Series analyzer by
installing Option 115. With this option installed, you can install all
currently available measurement personalities in your analyzer and
still have memory space to store more state and trace files than would
otherwise be possible.
To see the size of your installed memory for PSA Series Spectrum
Analyzers:
2. Press System, More, Show Hdwr.
3. Read Flash Memory size in the table. If Option 115 is installed, the
table will also show Compact Flash Type and Compact Flash
Size.
PSA Flash
Memory Size
Available Memory
Without Option
B7J and Option
122 or 140
Available Memory With
Option B7J and Option 122 or
140
64 Mbytes
32.5 MBytes
30.0 MBytes
48 Mbytes
16.9 MBytes
14.3 MBytes
PSA Compact Flash
Memory Size
Available Additional Memory for
Measurement Personalities
512 Mbytes (Opt. 115)
512 MBytes
If you have 48 MBytes of memory, and you want to install more than 3
optional personalities, you may need to manage your memory
resources. The following section, “How to Predict Your Memory
Requirements” on page 1-31, will help you decide how to configure your
installed options to provide optimal operation.
How to Predict Your Memory Requirements
If you plan to install many optional personalities, you should review
your memory requirements, so you can determine whether you have
enough memory (unless you have a PSA Series with Option 115). There
is an Agilent “Memory Calculator” available online that can help you do
this, or you can make a calculated approximation using the information
that follows. You will need to know your instrument’s installed memory
size as determined in the previous section and then select your desired
applications.
Chapter 1
31
Getting Started
1. Ensure that the spectrum analyzer is in spectrum analyzer mode
because this can affect the screen size.
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
NOTE
If you have a PSA Series analyzer with Option 115, there is adequate memory
to install all of the available optional personalities in your instrument.
To calculate the available memory on your PSA, see:
http://sa.tm.agilent.com/PSA/memory/
Select the “Memory Calculator” link. You can try any combination of
available personalities to see if your desired configuration is compatible
with your installed memory.
Getting Started
NOTE
After loading all your optional measurement personalities, you should
have a reserve of ~2 MBytes memory to facilitate mode switching. Less
available memory will increase mode switching time. For example, if
you employ excessive free memory by saving files of states and/or data,
your mode switching time can increase to more than a minute.
You can manually estimate your total memory requirements by adding
up the memory allocations described in the following steps. Compare
the desired total with the available memory that you identified in the
previous section.
1. Program memory - Select option requirements from the table
“Measurement Personality Options and Memory Required” on
page 1-33.
2. Shared libraries require 7.72 MBytes.
3. Recommended mode swap space is 2 MBytes.
4. Screens - .gif files need 20-25 kBytes each.
5. State memory - State file sizes range from 21 kB for SA mode to
40 kB for W-CDMA. The state of every mode accessed since power-on
will be saved in the state file. File sizes can exceed 150 kB each when
several modes are accessed, for each state file saved.
TIP
State memory retains settings for all states accessed before the Save State
command. To reduce this usage to a minimum, reduce the modes accessed
before the Save State is executed. You can set the PSA to boot into a selected
mode by accessing the desired mode, then pressing the System, Power
On/Preset, Power On keys and toggle the setting to Last.
32
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
Measurement Personality Options and Memory Required
Option
File Size
(PSA Rev: A.10)
cdmaOne measurement personality
BAC
1.91 Mbytes
NADC and PDC measurement personalities (not
available separately)
BAE
2.43 Mbytes
W-CDMA or W-CDMA, HSDPA, HSUPA
measurement personality
BAF, 210
5.38 Mbytesb
cdma2000 or cdma2000 w/ 1xEV-DV measurement
personality
B78, 214
4.00 Mbytesb
1xEV-DO measurement personality
204
5.61 Mbytesb
GSM (with EDGE) measurement personality
202
3.56 Mbytesb
Shared measurement libraryb
n/a
7.72 Mbytes
Phase Noise measurement personality
226
2.82 Mbytesc
Noise Figure measurement personality
219
4.68 Mbytesc
Basic measurement personality with digital demod
hardware
B7J
Cannot be deleted
(2.64 Mbytes)
Programming Code Compatibility Suited (8560
Series, 8590 Series, and 8566/8568)
266
1.18 Mbytesc
TD-SCDMA Power measurement personality
211
5.47 Mbytesc
TD-SCDMA Modulation Analysis or TD-SCDMA
Modulation Analysis w/ HSDPA/8PSK measurement
personality
212, 213
1.82 Mbytes
Flexible Digital Modulation Analysis
241
2.11 Mbytesb
WLAN measurement personality
217
3.24 Mbytesb
External Source Control
215
0.72 Mbytesc
Measuring Receiver Personality
233
2.91 Mbytesb
239
4.06 Mbytesb
Getting Started
Personality Options
for PSA Series Spectrum Analyzers a
(available with Option 23A - Trigger support for
AM/FM/PM and Option 23B - CCITT filter)
EMC Analyzer
a. Available as of the print date of this guide.
b. Many PSA Series personality options use a 7.72 Mbyte shared measurement library. If
you are loading multiple personalities that use this library, you only need to add this
memory allocation once.
c. Shared measurement library allocation not required.
d. This is a no charge option that does not require a license key.
Chapter 1
33
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
Memory Upgrade Kits
The PSA 64 MByte Memory Upgrade kit part number is
E4440AU-ANE. The PSA Compact Flash Upgrade kit part number is
E4440AU-115.
For more information about memory upgrade kits contact your local
sales office, service office, or see:
http://www.agilent.com/find/sa_upgrades
Loading an Optional Measurement Personality
Getting Started
You must use a PC to load the desired personality option into the
instrument memory. Loading can be done from a firmware CD-ROM or
by downloading the update program from the internet. An automatic
loading program comes with the files and runs from your PC.
You can check the Agilent internet website for the latest PSA firmware
versions available for downloading:
http://www.agilent.com/find/psa_firmware
NOTE
When you add a new option, or update an existing option, you will get the
updated versions of all your current options as they are all reloaded
simultaneously. This process may also require you to update the instrument
core firmware so that it is compatible with the new option.
Depending on your installed hardware memory, you may not be able to
fit all of the available measurement personalities in instrument
memory at the same time. You may need to delete an existing option file
from memory and load the one you want. Use the automatic update
program that is provided with the files. Refer to the table showing
“Measurement Personality Options and Memory Required” on
page 1-33. The approximate memory requirements for the options are
listed in this table. These numbers are worst case examples. Some
options share components and libraries, therefore the total memory
usage of multiple options may not be exactly equal to the combined
total.
Obtaining and Installing a License Key
If you purchase an optional personality that requires installation, you
will receive an “Entitlement Certificate” which may be redeemed for a
license key specific to one instrument. Follow the instructions that
accompany the certificate to obtain your license key.
To install a license key for the selected personality option, use the
following procedure:
NOTE
You can also use this procedure to reinstall a license key that has been deleted
34
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
during an uninstall process, or lost due to a memory failure.
1. Press System, More, More, Licensing, Option to accesses the alpha
editor. Use this alpha editor to enter letters (upper-case), and the
front-panel numeric keys to enter numbers for the option
designation. You will validate your option entry in the active
function area of the display. Then, press the Enter key.
2. Press License Key to enter the letters and digits of your license key.
You will validate your license key entry in the active function area of
the display. Then, press the Enter key.
3. Press the Activate License key.
Viewing a License Key
Use the following procedure to display the license key unique to your
personality option that is already installed in your PSA:
Press System, More, More, Licensing, Show License. The System,
Personality key displays the personalities loaded, version
information, and whether the personality is licensed.
NOTE
You will want to keep a copy of your license key in a secure location. Press
System, More, then Licensing, Show License, and print out a copy of the
display that shows the license numbers. If you should lose your license key, call
your nearest Agilent Technologies service or sales office for assistance.
Using the Delete License Key on PSA
This key will make the option unavailable for use, but will not delete it
from memory. Write down the 12-digit license key for the option before
you delete it. If you want to use that measurement personality later,
you will need the license key to reactivate the personality firmware.
NOTE
Using the Delete License key does not remove the personality from the
instrument memory, and does not free memory to be available to install
another option. If you need to free memory to install another option, refer to
the instructions for loading firmware updates located at the URL :
http://www.agilent.com/find/psa/
1. Press System, More, More, Licensing, Option. Pressing the Option key
will activate the alpha editor menu. Use the alpha editor to enter the
letters (upper-case) and the front-panel numeric keyboard to enter
the digits (if required) for the option, then press the Enter key. As you
Chapter 1
35
Getting Started
Measurement personalities purchased with your instrument have been
installed and activated at the factory before shipment. The instrument
requires a License Key unique to every measurement personality
purchased. The license key is a hexadecimal number specific to your
measurement personality, instrument serial number and host ID. It
enables you to install, or reactivate that particular personality.
Getting Started
Installing Option 266
enter the option, you will see your entry in the active function area of
the display.
2. Press Delete License to remove the license key from memory.
Ordering Optional Measurement Personalities
When you order a personality option, you will receive an entitlement
certificate. Then you will need to go to the Web site to redeem your
entitlement certificate for a license key. You will need to provide your
instrument serial number and host ID, and the entitlement certificate
number.
Getting Started
Required Information:
Front Panel Key Path:
Model #: (Ex. E4440A)
Host ID:
__________________
System, Show System
Instrument
Serial Number:
__________________
System, Show System
36
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Configuring Option 266 on PSA Analyzers
Configuring Option 266 on PSA Analyzers
Figure 1-1 shows the menu map to configure Option 266 (Programming
Code Compatibility Suite) on your spectrum analyzer. Pressing System,
Config I/0, Configure Remote Lang, Language on a PSA Series analyzer
allows you to select the remote programming language for the
instrument you are replacing.
Getting Started
Chapter 1
37
Getting Started
Configuring Option 266 on PSA Analyzers
Figure 1-1
System Menu Map for Option 266 on PSA Series Analyzers
System
System
Config I/O
Show Errors
GPIB Address
19
Language
SCPI
IP Address
Error Handling
Getting Started
Power On/
Preset
Time/Date
Host Name
visa
Alignments
Subnet Mask
Config I/O
Reference
More
1 of 3
Figure 1-2
Language
Error Handling
Preferences
Preferences
Gateway Address
SCPI LAN
Configure
Remote Lang
[SCPI]
Language Link Menu Map for All Analyzers
Language
Language
The selected softkey
on this menu shows
the current remote
language. If the
selected language is
not SCPI the value
displayed is that
returned on the 'ID?'.
Default value is SCPI.
NOTE
Conf Rem Lang
Language
Language
SCPI
HP8592L
HP8596E
HP8566A
HP8594L
HP8560E/EC
HP8566B
HP8591E
HP8561E/EC
HP8568A
HP8593E
HP8562E/EC
HP8568B
HP8594E
HP8590L
HP8595E
More
More
1 of 4
2 of 4
Language
HP8565E/EC
HP8563E/EC
HP8564E/EC
More
More
3 of 4
4 of 4
The language softkeys are not in alphanumeric order.
38
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Configuring Option 266 on PSA Analyzers
Figure 1-3
Error Handling Link Menu Map
Error Handling
Error Handling
On
Command Err
Off
Cmd Error Log
On
Off
Clear Command
Error Log
Getting Started
Figure 1-4
Preferences Link Menu Map
Preferences
Preferences
Limit RBW/VBW
On
Off
Atten Offset
On
Off
Save Reg 7
(Preset Only)
On
Off
Chapter 1
39
Getting Started
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu - PSA Analyzers
Getting Started
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu PSA Analyzers
Configure
Remote Lang
This key displays a menu allowing you to select the remote language
you wish to use, and to determine how command error messages are
stored and displayed.
Language
This key allows you to select which remote programming language you
wish to use.
SCPI
Selects the SCPI remote programming language. This is
the default setting after installation.
HP8560E/EC
Selects the HP8560E/EC remote programming language
and sets the response to the remote programming
command ‘ID?’ to HP8560E. It also performs an
instrument preset and sets Span, Trace Points,
couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8561E/EC
Selects the HP8561E/EC remote programming language
and sets the response to the remote programming
command ‘ID?’ to HP8561E. It also performs an
instrument preset and sets Span, Trace Points,
couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8562E/EC
Selects the HP8562E/EC remote programming language
and sets the response to the remote programming
command ‘ID?’ to HP8562E. It also performs an
instrument preset and sets Span, Trace Points,
couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8563E/EC
Selects the HP8563E/EC remote programming language
and sets the response to the remote programming
command ‘ID?’ to HP8563E. It also performs an
instrument preset and sets Span, Trace Points,
couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8564E/EC
Selects the HP8564E/EC remote programming language
and sets the response to the remote programming
command ‘ID?’ to HP8564E. It also performs an
instrument preset and sets Span, Trace Points,
couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8565E/EC
Selects the HP8565E/EC remote programming language
and sets the response to the remote programming
command ‘ID?’ to HP8565E. It also performs an
40
Chapter 1
Getting Started
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu - PSA Analyzers
instrument preset and sets Span, Trace Points,
couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-3 on page 42.
Selects the HP8566A remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8566A. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8566B
Selects the HP8566B remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8566B. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8568A
Selects the HP8568A remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8568A. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8568B
Selects the HP8568B remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8568B. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8590L
Selects the HP8590L remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8590L. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8591E
Selects the HP8591E remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8591E. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8592L
Selects the HP8592L remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8592L. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8593E
Selects the HP8593E remote programming language and
Chapter 1
41
Getting Started
HP8566A
Getting Started
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu - PSA Analyzers
Getting Started
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8593E. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8594E
Selects the HP8594E remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8594E. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8594L
Selects the HP8594L remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8594L. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8595E
Selects the HP8595E remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8595E. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
HP8596E
Selects the HP8596E remote programming language and
sets the response to the remote programming command
‘ID?’ to HP8596E. It also performs an instrument preset
and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW
ratio, and Span/RBW ratio appropriately as shown in
Table 1-3 on page 42.
NOTE
Setting the remote language to anything other than ‘SCPI’ does not
affect the response to the SCPI command ‘*IDN?’ This command will
still return the model number and firmware version number of the PSA
Series spectrum analyzer.
Table 1-3
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW
Ratio Settings
Remote
Language
Start
Freq.
Stop
Freq.
Number
of Trace
Points
RF
Coupling
VBW/RBW
Ratio
Span/RBW
Ratio
HP8560E/EC
0 Hz
2.9 GHz
601
AC
1
91
HP8561E/EC
0 Hz
6.5 GHz
601
AC
1
91
HP8562E/EC
0 Hz
13.2 GHz
601
AC
1
91
HP8563E/EC
0 Hz
26.5 GHz
601
AC
1
91
42
Chapter 1
Getting Started
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu - PSA Analyzers
Table 1-3
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW
Ratio Settings
Remote
Language
Start
Freq.
Stop
Freq.
Number
of Trace
Points
RF
Coupling
VBW/RBW
Ratio
Span/RBW
Ratio
HP8564E/EC
0 Hz
40 GHz
601
AC
1
91
HP8565E/EC
0 Hz
50 GHz
601
AC
1
91
HP8566A
2 GHz
22 GHz
1001
DC
3
106
(VBW one
step wider
than RBW)
2 GHz
22 GHz
1001
DC
3
Getting Started
HP8566B
106
(VBW one
step wider
than RBW)
HP8568A
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
1001
DC
3
106
(VBW one
step wider
than RBW)
HP8568B
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
1001
DC
3
106
(VBW one
step wider
than RBW)
HP8590L
0 Hz
1.8 GHz
401
DC
0.3
106
HP8591E
0 Hz
1.8 GHz
401
DC
0.3
106
HP8592L
2.75
GHz
22 GHz
401
DC
0.3
106
HP8593E
2.75
GHz
22 GHz
401
DC
0.3
106
HP8594E
0 Hz
2.9 GHz
401
AC
0.3
106
HP8594L
0 Hz
2.9 GHz
401
DC
0.3
106
HP8595E
0 Hz
6.5 GHz
401
AC
0.3
106
HP8596E
0 Hz
12.8 GHz
401
AC
0.3
106
Command Err
This key determines whether or not command errors are displayed on
the screen. When set to On, error messages generated by unrecognized
commands or command arguments are displayed on the screen. When
set to Off, error messages generated by unrecognized commands are not
displayed. The current setting is underlined on the key label, and this
setting is toggled each time the key is pressed.
Chapter 1
43
Getting Started
The Configure Remote Lang Screen Menu - PSA Analyzers
Cmd Error Log
This key sets command error logging On or Off. When set to On, all error
messages are stored in a log file, regardless of whether they have been
displayed on the screen. When set to Off, no further command error
messages are written to the log file.
Getting Started
The log file is an ASCII text file called LOGFILE.TXT on the C: drive. It
has a maximum size of 32 KB. Once it has reached its maximum size,
no further error messages will be recorded, but a message will be
displayed prompting you to clear the log file. Switching Cmd Error Log to
Off does not clear the log file. Only the Clear Command Error Log softkey
will clear the error log.
Clear Command
Error Log
This key allows you to clear all messages from the command error log
file LOGFILE.TXT. You will be asked to press the key a second time to
confirm your decision to clear the log file.
Limit RBW/VBW
This key toggles the Limit RBW/VBW between On and Off. Setting it to
On causes the range of values for resolution and video bandwidths to be
limited, dependent on the remote language selected.
NOTE
This restriction on RBW and VBW range changes to use the base PSA
range of bandwidths if the detector type is set to Quasi Peak, MIL Peak,
EMI Average, or Average.
Setting this key to Off causes the resolution bandwidth and video
bandwidth filters to use the base PSA range of values for all remote
languages.
Atten Offset
This key toggles a supplemental attenuation On and Off. The default
state is Off. Setting it to On sets a fixed 12 dB supplemental
attenuation in the hardware to prevent too great a signal at the input to
the mixer (0 dBm maximum) for
reference level settings of up to +12 dBm. The selected condition is
preserved when Preset is pressed or power is cycled.
Save Reg 7
This key enables or disables the saving of the Preset State in Register 7
(RC 7). Setting this to On causes the Preset State to be saved in
Register 7, but it can slow your analyzer down. Setting this to Off will
make your analyzer run faster, but the Preset State is not saved in
Register 7.
44
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands
Running Software that Requires SCPI
Commands
When a Remote Language other than SCPI has been selected, you will
only have access to a very small subset of SCPI commands. If you are
not familiar with the SCPI remote programming language, Chapter 5 ,
“A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language,”on page 373 contains some
useful information.
The SCPI commands available while using other remote languages are:
• *IDN?
Getting Started
Queries and returns the instrument identification string.
• *RST
Performs an instrument preset.
• :SYSTem:LANGuage SCPI | HP8560E | HP8561E | HP8562E |
HP8563E | HP8564E | HP8565E | HP8566A | HP8566B | HP8568A |
HP8568B | HP8590L | HP8591E | HP8592L | HP8593E | HP8594E |
HP8594L | HP8595E | HP8596E
Sets the current remote language. This command is only available if
you have Option 266 installed on your analyzer.
NOTE
Agilent Technologies recommends that you do not repeatedly swap to
and from the SCPI language within your programs.
• :SYSTem:LANGuage?
Queries and returns the current remote language. This command is
only available if you have Option 266 installed on your analyzer.
• [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO|SWEep|FFT
Sets the Sweep Type. This command is only valid on the PSA Series
of analyzers.
• [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE?
Queries and returns the Sweep Type. This command is only valid on
the PSA Series of analyzers.
• [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes SPEed|DRANge
Sets the auto rule setting for FFT and Sweep Type. This command is
only valid on the PSA Series of analyzers.
• [:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
Queries and returns the auto rule setting for FFT and Sweep Type.
This command is only valid on the PSA Series of analyzers.
• :SYSTem:OPTion?
Chapter 1
45
Getting Started
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands
Returns a list of installed options.
If Option 266 is installed on your analyzer, the string “266” will
appear in the returned string. In the following example, options B7J,
266, and 110 are all installed.
Example: “B7J,266,110”
Getting Started
To return the analyzer to its full PSA SCPI capability, you must specify
the remote language as SCPI.
46
Chapter 1
Getting Started
Service and Calibration
Service and Calibration
Since the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software uses the
SCPI command language, you will need to set Remote Language to
SCPI prior to calibration or service of your Agilent spectrum analyzer.
When your analyzer is returned from an Agilent Technologies service
center, you may have to reinstall Option 266. Refer to “Installing
Option 266” on page 30.
Getting Started
Chapter 1
47
Getting Started
Documentation for Option 266
Documentation for Option 266
Spectrum Analyzers with Option 266
When you purchase your PSA Series spectrum analyzer with the
Programming Code Compatibility Suite (Option 266), you will receive
this manual - the Programming Code Compatibility Suite Guide. For
information on PSA series analyzers and other related documentation,
refer to the PSA web site at http://www.agilent.com/find/psa/.
Getting Started
This Programming Code Compatibility Suite Guide is not designed to
be a comprehensive guide to all legacy commands. It gives brief
descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important
functional or behavioral differences that you should be aware of when
transferring your existing code to your PSA Series analyzer. For a fuller
description of these commands, refer to the manuals supplied with your
original analyzer.
Spectrum Analyzer Updates
For the latest information about this instrument, including software
upgrades, application information, and product information, please
visit the URL below.
Updating the Firmware and Software
Updated versions of the Agilent Spectrum Analyzers’ firmware and
software will be available via several sources. Information on the latest
firmware and software revision can be accessed through the following
URL:
http://www.agilent.com/find/psa/
NOTE
If you have received Option 266 as an upgrade, the latest version of the
analyzer’s firmware has been included and should be loaded into your
instrument before installing the Option 266.
48
Chapter 1
Legacy Analyzer Command List
2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
49
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
The following table lists all of the original programming commands
from the legacy analyzers (that is, the 8566A/B, the 8568A/B, the 8560
Series and the 8590 Series), and indicates which are supported in
Option 266. Refer to the alphabetical listing of commands in Chapter 4 ,
“Programming Commands,” on page 85 for more detailed information
about each supported command.
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
A1
Clear-writes trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 89
A2
Max Holds trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 90
A3
View trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 91
A4
Blanks trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 92
ABORT
Interrupt operation of all
user-defined functions
N/A
N/A
No
No
ABS
Absolute
No
No
No
No
ACP
Performs the adjacent
channel power
measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
ACPACCL
Accelerate adjacent channel
power measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
ACPALPHA
Adjacent channel power
alpha weighting
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 94
ACPALTCH
Adjacent channel power
alternate channels
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 95
ACPBRPER
Adjacent channel power
burst period
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 96
ACPBRWID
Adjacent channel power
burst width
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 97
ACPBW
Specifies channel
bandwidth for ACP
measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 98
ACPCOMPUTE
Compute adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 99
50
Page 93
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
ACPCONTM
Performs ACP
measurement in continuous
sweep
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACPE
Adjacent channel power
extended
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACPERR
ACP measurement error
query
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent channel power
frequency weighting
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
ACPGR
Adjacent channel power
graph on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACPGRAPH
Compute adjacent channel
power graph
N/A
N/A
No
No
ACPLOWER
Lower adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 101
ACPMAX
Maximum adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 102
ACPMEAS
Measure adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 103
ACPMETHOD
Adjacent channel power
measurement method
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
ACPMK
Adjacent channel power
marker on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent channel power
measurement state
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 104
ACPPAR
ACP manual or auto
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 105
ACPPWRTX
Total power transmitted
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 106
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent channel power
measurement results
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 107
ACPSNGLM
Performs ACP
measurement in single
sweep
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACPSP
Channel spacing
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 108
ACPT
Adjacent channel power
T weighting
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 109
Page 100
51
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
ACPUPPER
Upper adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 110
ACTDEF
Give user-defined function
active status
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACTVF
Active function
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ACTVFUNC
Creates a user defined
active function
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
ADD
Add
No
No
No
No
ADJALL
LO & IF adjustment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
ADJCRT
Adjust CRT alignment
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
ADJIF
Adjust IF
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AMB
Trace A − trace B -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 112
AMBPL
Trace A − trace B + Display
Line -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 113
AMPCOR
Applies amplitude
correction at specified
frequencies
N/A
N/A
No
No
AMPCORDATA
Amplitude correction data
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORSAVE
Save amplitude correction
data
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORSIZE
Amplitude correction data
array size
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORRCL
Amplitude correction recall
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AMPLEN
Amplitude correction
length
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ANLGPLUS
Turns on or off the Analog+
display mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ANNOT
Display Annotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 115
APB
Trace A + trace B -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 116
ARRAYDEF
Defines an array
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AT
Input Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 117
AUNITS
Amplitude Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 119
52
Page 111
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
AUTO
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 121
AUTOCPL
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 123
AUTOEXEC
Turns on or off the function
defined with AUTOFUNC
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOFUNC
Defines a function for
automatic execution
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOSAVE
Automatically saves trace
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
AVG
Average
No
No
No
No
AXB
Exchange Traces A & B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 124
B1
Clear-writes trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 125
B2
Max Holds trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 126
B3
View trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 127
B4
Blanks trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 128
BAUDRATE
Baud rate of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
BIT
Return or receive state of
bit
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
BITF
Bit flag
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
BL
Trace B − Display line ->
trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 129
BLANK
Blanks specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 130
BML
Trace B − Display line ->
trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 131
BRD
Bus Read
No
No
N/A
N/A
BTC
Transfer trace B to C
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
BWR
Bus Write
No
No
N/A
N/A
BXC
Exchange Traces B & C
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 133
C1
Turns off A - B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 134
C2
A − B -> A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 135
CA
Couples Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 136
CAL
Calibrate
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 137
Chapter 2
Page 132
53
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
CARDLOAD
Copies data from memory
card to module memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
CARDSTORE
Copies data to memory card
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
CARROFF
Carrier off power
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
CARRON
Carrier on power
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
CAT
Catalog
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CATALOG
Catalog
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
CF
Center Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 139
CHANNEL
Channel selection
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 140
CHANPWR
Channel power
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 141
CHP
Performs the channel
power measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 142
CHPGR
Channel power graph on or
off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CHPWRBW
Channel power bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 143
CLRAVG
Reset avg. counter to 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 144
CLRBOX
Clears a rectangular area
on the analyzer display
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CLRDSP
Clear display
N/A
N/A
No
No
CLRSCHED
Clears autosave & autoexec
schedule buffer
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
CLRW
Clear-writes specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 145
CLS
Clear status byte
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 146
CMDERRQ
Command error query
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CNF
Confidence test
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CNTLA
Auxiliary interface control
line A
N/A
N/A
No
No
CNTLB
Auxiliary interface control
line B
N/A
N/A
No
No
CNTLC
Auxiliary interface control
line C
N/A
N/A
No
No
54
Page for
Further
Details
Page 138
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
CNTLD
Auxiliary interface control
line D
N/A
N/A
No
No
CNTLI
Auxiliary interface control
line input
N/A
N/A
No
No
CNVLOSS
Selects ref level offset to
calibrate amplitude display
No
N/A
N/A
No
COMB
Turns the comb generator
on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
COMPRESS
Compress
No
No
No
N/A
CONCAT
Concat
No
No
No
N/A
CONTS
Continuous sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 147
CORREK
Correction factors on
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 148
COUPLE
Selects AC or DC coupling
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 149
CR
Couples Resolution BW
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 150
CRTHPOS
Horizontal position of CRT
display
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CRTVPOS
Vertical position of CRT
display
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
CS
Couples Step Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 151
CT
Couples Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 152
CTA
Converts display units to
dBm
No
No
No
N/A
CTM
Converts dBm to display
units
No
No
No
N/A
CTRLHPIB
Allows SA to control HP-IB
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
CV
Couples Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
D1
Sets display to normal size
No
No
N/A
N/A
D2
Sets display to full CRT size
No
No
N/A
N/A
D3
Sets display to expanded
size
No
No
N/A
N/A
DA
Display Memory Address
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
DATEMODE
Set the date display format
N/A
N/A
No
No
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Page 153
Page 154
55
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
DD
Display write binary
No
No
N/A
N/A
DELMKBW
Occupied power bandwidth
within delta marker
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
DEMOD
Turns the demodulator on
or off
N/A
N/A
No
No
DEMODAGC
Demodulation automatic
gain control
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODT
Demodulation time
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
DET
Detection Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DISPOSE
Frees Memory
No
No
No
No
DIV
Divide
No
No
No
No
DL
Display Line Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 158
DLE
Turns the display line on/off
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 160
DLYSWP
Delay sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 161
DN
Reduces the active function
by applicable step size
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
DONE
Synchronizing function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DOTDENS
Sets the dot density value
in Analog+ display mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
DR
Display Memory Address
Read
No
No
N/A
N/A
DRAWBOX
Draws a rectangular box on
analyzer display
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
DSPLY
Display
No
No
No
No
DT
Define Terminator
No
No
No
N/A
DW
Display Memory Address
Write
No
No
N/A
N/A
E1
Active marker to maximum
signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 163
E2
Active marker to center
frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 164
E3
Active marker frequency to
CF step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 165
56
Page for
Further
Details
Page 155
Page 156
Page 162
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
E4
Active marker to reference
level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 166
EDITDONE
Indicates limit line editing
is complete
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 167
EDITLIML
Allows current limit line to
be edited
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 168
EE
Enable entry
No
No
No
N/A
EK
Enable knob
No
No
No
N/A
ELSE
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
N/A
No
EM
Erase trace C memory
No
No
No
No
ENDIF
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
N/A
N/A
ENTER
Enter from HP-IB
No
No
No
No
EP
Enter parameter function
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ERASE
User memory & registers
erased
No
No
No
N/A
ERR
Queries the error queue
Yes
Yes
N/A
Yes
Page 169
ET
Elapsed time
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 170
EX
Exchanges trace A & B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 171
EXP
Exponential
No
No
No
No
EXTMXR
Presets external mixing
mode
No
N/A
N/A
No
FA
Start frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 172
FB
Stop frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 173
FDIAG
Frequency diagnostics
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
FDSP
Frequency display off
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
FFT
Fast fourier transform
No
No
No
No
FFTAUTO
Marker to Auto FFT
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTCLIP
FFT signal clipped
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTCONTS
FFT continuous sweep
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
Chapter 2
Page 174
57
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
FFTKNL
Fast fourier transform
kernel
No
No
N/A
N/A
FFTMKR
FFT markers
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTMM
FFT marker to midscreen
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTMS
FFT marker to FFT stop
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTOFF
FFT off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTPCTAM
FFT percent amplitude
modulation
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTPCTAMR
FFT percent amplitude
modulation readout
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTSNGLS
FFT single sweep
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTSTAT
FFT status
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FFTSTOP
FFT stop frequency
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FMGAIN
FM gain
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
FOFFSET
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FORMAT
Erase & format the selected
memory device
N/A
N/A
No
No
FPKA
Fast preselector peak
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page 176
FREF
Frequency reference
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 177
FS
Full frequency span
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 178
FULBAND
Set start/stop freq for ext
mixing bands
No
N/A
N/A
No
FUNCDEF
Function definition
No
No
No
No
GATE
Turn time-gating on or off
N/A
N/A
No
No
GATECTL
Gate control
N/A
N/A
No
No
GC
Gate preset
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GD
Gate delay
N/A
N/A
No
No
GDRVCLPAR
Clear pulse parameters
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVGDEL
Gate Delay for the
frequency window
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
58
Page for
Further
Details
Page 175
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
GDRVGLEN
Gate length for frequency &
time windows
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVGT
Turns gate in frequency
window on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVGTIM
Gate trigger to marker
position for time window
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVPRI
Pulse repetition interval
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVPWID
Pulse width
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVRBW
Couple resolution
bandwidth to pulse width
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVREFE
Enter reference edge
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVST
Couple sweep time to pulse
repetition interval
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVSWAP
Update the time or
frequency window
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVSWDE
Delay sweep for time
window
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVSWP
Sweep time for the time
window
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVUTIL
Turns the gate utility on or
off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GDRVVBW
Couple video bandwidth to
the gate length
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GETPLOT
Get plot
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GETPRNT
Get print
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
GL
Gate length
N/A
N/A
No
No
GP
Sets the polarity
(positive/negative) of the
gate trigger
N/A
N/A
No
No
GR
Plot GPIB input as Graphs
No
No
No
N/A
GRAT
Graticule on/off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HAVE
Checks for options installed
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
HD
Holds data entry
No
No
Yes
No
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Page 180
Page 181
59
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
HN
Harmonic number
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
HNLOCK
Harmonic lock
No
N/A
No
No
HNUNLK
Harmonic band unlock
No
N/A
No
No
IB
Input to trace B memory
No
No
No
N/A
I1
Sets the RF coupling to AC
N/A
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 182
I2
Sets the RF coupling to DC
N/A
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 183
ID
Instrument identification
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 184
IDCF
Identified signal to center
frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
IDFREQ
Identified signal frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
IDSTAT
Signal identifier status
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
IF
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
No
IFTKNL
16 bit discrete fourier
transform
No
No
N/A
N/A
INT
Integer
No
No
No
No
INZ
Input impedance
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
IP
Instrument preset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
KEYCLR
Clear user defined keys
N/A
N/A
No
No
KEYCMD
Define function & label of
softkey
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
KEYDEF
Assign function to soft key
No
No
No
No
KEYENH
Key enhance
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
KEYEXC
Executes specified soft key
No
No
No
N/A
KEYLBL
Relabels softkey without
changing its function
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
KS,
Mixer level
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 186
KS=
HP8566: Selects factory
preselector setting
HP8568: Marker counter
frequency resolution
No
Yes
No
No
Page 187
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS(
Locks the save registers
60
Page for
Further
Details
Page 185
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
KS)
Unlocks the save registers
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS>
Specifies preamp gain for
signal input 2
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
KS<
Specifies preamp gain for
signal input 1
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
KS|
Display memory address
write
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS#
Turns off YTX self-heating
correction
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
KS/
Allows preselector to be
peaked manually
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
KS123
Returns up to 1001 words
display memory
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS125
Writes up to 1001 display
memory words
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS126
Returns every Nth value of
a trace
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS127
Sets analyzer to accept
binary display write
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS39
Writes display memory
address in fast binary
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS43
Sets SRQ 102 when
frequency limit exceeded
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS91
Returns the amplitude
error
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS92
Specifies value DL, TH,
active mkr in display units
No
No
N/A
N/A
KS94
Returns code for harmonic
number in binary
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSA
Sets amplitude units to
dBm
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 188
KSa
Selects normal detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 189
KSB
Sets amplitude units to
dBmV
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 190
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
61
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
KSb
Selects positive peak
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 191
KSC
Sets amplitude units to
dBuV
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 192
KSc
Trace A + trace B -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 193
KSD
Sets amplitude units to V
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 194
KSd
Selects negative peak
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 195
KSE
Sets the analyzer title mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 196
KSe
Selects sample detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 197
KSF
HP8566: Shifts the YTO
HP8568: Measures the
Sweep Time
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSf
Recover last instrument
state at power on
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSG
Turns on video averaging
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 198
KSg
Turns off the display
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 199
KSH
Turns off video averaging
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 200
KSh
Turns on the display
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 201
KSI
Allows the reference level to
be extended
No
No
N/A
N/A
Page 202
KSi
Exchanges traces B & C
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 203
KSJ
Manual control of DACs
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSj
Views trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 204
KSK
HP8566: Active Mkr to next
highest peak
HP8568: Counts pilot IF at
marker
Yes
No
N/A
N/A
Page 205
KSk
Blanks trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 206
KSL
Turns off marker noise
function
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 207
KSl
Moves trace B into trace C
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 208
62
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
KSM
Turns on marker noise
function
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 209
KSm
Turns off the graticule
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 211
KSN
Marker minimum value
detected
Yes
No
N/A
N/A
Page 212
KSn
Turns on the graticule
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 213
KSO
Marker span
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 214
KSo
Turns off the annotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 215
KSP
GPIB address
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSp
Turns on the annotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSQ
Unlocks frequency band
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSq
Decouples IF gain and
input attenuation
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSR
Turns on service
diagnostics
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSr
Sets service request 102
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSS
HP8566: Fast GPIB
operation
HP8568: Determine second
LO frequency
No
No
N/A
N/A
KST
HP8566: Fast preset
HP8568: Shifts second LO
down
Yes
No
N/A
N/A
KSt
HP8566: Locks frequency
band
HP8568: Continues sweep
from marker
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSU
HP8566: External mixer
preset
HP8568: Shift second LO
up
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSu
Stops the sweep at the
active marker
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSV
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 217
Page 218
63
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Chapter 2
Page 216
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
KSv
HP8566: External mixer
frequency identifier
HP8568: Inhibits phase
lock
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSW
Amplitude error correction
routine
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSw
Displays amplitude error
correction routine
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSX
Amplitude correction
factors on
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSx
Sets trigger mode to
external
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
KSY
Amplitude correction
factors off
No
No
N/A
N/A
KSy
Sets trigger mode to video
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 220
KSZ
Reference level offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 221
KSz
Sets the display storage
address
No
No
N/A
N/A
L0
Turns off the display line
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LB
Writes text label
No
No
No
No
LCLVAR
Defines a local variable for
use
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
LF
Preset 0−2.5GHz
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 223
LG
Selects log scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 224
LIMD
Delta amplitude value for
limit line segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 226
LIMF
Frequency value for
limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 227
LIMIDEL
Erase contents of limit line
table
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 228
LIMIDISP
Controls when the limit
line(s) are displayed
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 229
LIMIFAIL
Limit line fail
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 230
64
Page for
Further
Details
Page 219
Page 222
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
LIMIFT
Select frequency or time
limit line
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 231
LIMIHI
Upper limit
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMILINE
Limit line
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMILO
Lower limit
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMIMIRROR
Mirror limit line
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMIMODE
Limit line entry mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMIPURGE
Disposes of current limit
line, not limit line table
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMIRCL
Load stored limit line into
limit line table
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
LIMIREL
Determine whether limit
line values
absolute/relative
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
LIMISAV
Save contents of limit line
table for recall
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
LIMISEG
Define slope & offset of
limit line segments
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMISEGT
Enter limit line segment for
sweep time
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LIMITEST
Compare active trace data
to limit line parameters
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 234
LIML
Amplitude value for limit
line segment in lower limit
line
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 235
LIMM
Middle amplitude value for
limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 236
LIMTFL
Specifies a flat limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
LIMTSL
Specifies a sloped limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
LIMU
Amplitude value for limit
line segment in upper limit
line
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
LINFILL
Line fill
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
Page 233
Page 237
65
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Chapter 2
Page 232
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
LL
Provides lower left recorder
output voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
N/A
LN
Selects linear scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
Load article/file into
internal memory
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
LOG
Log
No
No
No
No
LOLIMOFF
LO Limit Off
No
No
N/A
N/A
LSPAN
Last span
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 239
M1
Turns off all markers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 240
M2
Marker Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 241
M3
Marker Delta
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 242
M4
Marker zoom
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 244
MA
Returns the amplitude of
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 245
MBIAS
Mixer bias
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MBRD
Processor memory block
read
No
No
N/A
N/A
MBWR
Processor memory block
write
No
No
N/A
N/A
MC0
Turns off the marker
frequency counter
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 246
MC1
Turns on the marker
frequency counter
N/A
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 247
MDS
Measurement data size
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 248
MDU
Measurement data units
No
No
No
N/A
MEAN
Returns mean value of
trace in display units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 249
MEANPWR
Mean power measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 250
MEANTH
Trace mean above threshold
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
MEAS
Measurement status
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MEASOFF
Measurement off
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
MEASURE
Measure mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
66
Page for
Further
Details
Page 238
Page 251
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
MEM
Returns amount of memory
available
No
No
No
No
MENU
Menu
N/A
N/A
No
No
MERGE
Merge two traces
No
No
No
N/A
MF
Returns frequency of the
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MIN
Minimum
No
No
No
No
MINH
Min Hold
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 253
MINPOS
Returns the minimum
position in the trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 254
MIRROR
Mirror image of the trace
No
No
No
N/A
MKA
Amplitude of the active
marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 255
MKACT
Specifies the active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 256
MKACTV
Marker as the active
function
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
MKBW
Marker bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 257
MKCF
Moves the active marker to
center frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 258
MKCHEDGE
Marker to channel edge
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MKCONT
Continues sweeping from
the marker after stop
No
No
No
N/A
MKD
Delta marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MKDELCHBW
Delta markers to channel
power bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MKDLMODE
Marker delta display line
mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
MKDR
Reciprocal of marker delta
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MKF
Specifies the frequency of
the active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 261
MKFC
Turns the marker
frequency counter on or off
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 262
Page 252
Page 259
67
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
MKFCR
Specifies the marker
frequency counter
resolution
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 263
MKMCF
Marker mean to center
frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MKMIN
Moves active marker to
minimum signal detected
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 264
MKN
Normal marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 265
MKNOISE
Marker noise function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 266
MKOFF
Turns all markers or the
active marker off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 268
MKP
Specifies the horizontal
position of the marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 269
MKPAUSE
Pauses the sweep at the
active marker
No
No
No
N/A
MKPK
Marker peak
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 270
MKPT
Marker peak threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 271
MKPX
Marker peak excursion
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 272
MKREAD
Specifies marker readout
mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 273
MKRL
Moves the active marker to
reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 275
MKSP
Marker span
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 276
MKSS
Marker step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 277
MKSTOP
Stops the sweep at the
active marker
No
No
No
N/A
MKT
Position marker in units of
time
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 278
MKTBL
Marker table
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
Page 279
MKTRACE
Marker trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 280
MKTRACK
Turns the marker signal
track on or off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 281
MKTYPE
Specifies the type of active
marker to be used
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
Page 282
68
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
ML
Mixer Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 283
MOD
Modulo
No
No
No
No
MODE
Mode of operation
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
MODRCLT
Recalls trace from module
memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MODSAVT
Saves trace in module
memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MOV
Move
No
No
No
No
MPY
Multiply
No
No
No
No
MRD
Memory Read
No
No
N/A
N/A
MRDB
Memory read byte
No
No
N/A
N/A
MSDEV
Specifies mass storage
device
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
MSI
Mass storage interface
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
MT0
Turns off marker signal
track
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 285
MT1
Turns on marker signal
track
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 286
MWR
Memory Write
No
No
N/A
N/A
MWRB
Memory write byte
No
No
N/A
N/A
MXM
Maximum
No
No
No
No
MXMH
Max Hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MXRMODE
Mixer mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
NDB
Number of dB
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
NDBPNT
Turns the N dB points
function on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
NDBPNTR
N dB points bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
NORMLIZE
Normalize trace data
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
NRL
Normalized reference level
N/A
N/A
No
No
NRPOS
Normalized reference
position
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
Chapter 2
Page 287
69
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
NSTART
Start harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
NSTOP
Stop harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
O1
Output format
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 288
O2
Output format
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 289
O3
Output format
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 290
O4
Output format
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 291
OA
Returns the active function
value
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBW
Occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBWBW
Bandwidth measured by
occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBWFERR
Occupied bandwidth
transmit frequency error
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBWLOWER
Relative lower frequency
limit of occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBWPCT
Occupied bandwidth
percent
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBWPWR
Total power in the occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OBWUPPER
Relative upper frequency
limit of occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OCCUP
Percent occupied power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 292
OL
Output learn string
Yes
Yes
No
N/A
Page 293
ONCYCLE
On cycle
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ONDELAY
On delay
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ONEOS
On end of sweep
No
No
No
No
ONMKR
On marker pause
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ONMKRU
On marker update
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ONPWRUP
On power up
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ONSRQ
On service request
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ONSWP
On sweep
No
No
No
N/A
70
Page for
Further
Details
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
ONTIME
On time
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
OP
Output parameters
No
No
No
No
OR
Set position of origin
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
OT
Output trace annotations
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
OUTPUT
Output - sending data to
the GPIB from function
No
No
No
No
PA
Plot absolute
No
No
No
No
PARSTAT
Parallel status
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PCTAM
Turns the percent AM
measurement on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PCTAMR
Percent AM response
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PD
Pen down
No
No
No
No
PDA
Probability distribution
amplitude
No
No
No
No
PDF
Probability distribution
frequency
No
No
No
No
PEAKS
Sorts the signal peaks by
amplitude/frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PKDLMODE
Peak table delta display
line mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PKPOS
Peak position
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
PKRES
Peak result
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PKSORT
Selects how to sort signal
peaks listed in peak table
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PKTBL
Turns the peak table on or
off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PKZMOK
Peak zoom okay
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PKZOOM
Peak zoom
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PLOT
Prints the screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLOTORG
Display origins
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
PLOTSRC
Plot source
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
PLTPRT
Plot port
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Page 294
Page 295
Page 296
Page 297
71
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
POWERON
Power on state
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PP
Peaks the preselector
Yes
N/A
Yes
Yes
PR
Plot relative
No
No
No
No
PREAMPG
External preamplifier gain
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
PREFX
Change user memory
entries file prefix
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PRINT
Print
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
PRNPRT
Print port
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PRNTADRS
Print address
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PS
Skip page
No
No
N/A
N/A
PSDAC
Preselector DAC number
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
PSTATE
Protect state
N/A
N/A
No
No
PU
Pen up
No
No
No
No
PURGE
Purge file
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
PWRBW
Power bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 301
PWRUPTIME
Power up time
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 302
Q0
Sets detector to EMI Peak
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 303
Q1
Sets detector to Quasi Peak
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 304
R1
Resets service request 140
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 305
R2
Allows service request 140
& 104
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 306
R3
Allows service request 140
& 110
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 307
R4
Allows service request 140
& 102
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 308
RB
Resolution bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 309
RBR
Resolution bandwidth/Span
ratio
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 311
RC
Recalls state register
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 312
72
Page for
Further
Details
Page 298
Page 299
Page 300
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
RCLOSCAL
Recall open/short average
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
RCLS
Recall state
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCLT
Recall trace
N/A
N/A
No
No
RCLTHRU
Recall internal
thru-reference trace into
trace B
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
RELHPIB
Release control of GPIB
N/A
N/A
No
No
REPEAT
Conditional Programming
(Repeat .. Until …)
No
No
No
No
RESETRL
Reset reference level
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
RETURN
Return to user defined
function origination point
N/A
N/A
No
No
REV
Returns the revision string
to the controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 314
RL
Reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 315
RLCAL
Reference level calibration
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
RLPOS
Reference level position
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
RMS
Root mean square
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 317
ROFFSET
Reference level offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 318
RQS
SRQ mask
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 319
S1
Continuous sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 320
S2
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 321
SADD
Adds a limit line segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 322
SAVEMENU
Save menu
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SAVES
Saves analyzer state to
specified register
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SAVET
Save trace
N/A
N/A
No
No
SAVRCLF
Save or recall flag
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SAVRCLN
Save or recall number
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SAVRCLW
Save or recall data
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SDEL
Deletes a limit line segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 313
Page 323
Page 324
73
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
SDON
Indicates limit line segment
is done
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 325
SEDI
Edits limit line segment
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 326
SEGDEL
Delete specified segment
from limit line tables
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SENTER
Segment entry for
frequency limit lines
N/A
N/A
Yes
No
SENTERT
Segment entry for sweep
time limit lines
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SER
Serial number
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 328
SETDATE
Set the date of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 329
SETTIME
Set the time of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 330
SHOWMENU
Shows menu
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SIGDEL
Signal amplitude delta
No
N/A
N/A
N/A
SIGID
External mixing frequency
bands signal identifier
No
N/A
N/A
No
SKYCLR
Clears user softkey
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SKYDEF
Defines user softkey
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SMOOTH
Smooths given trace over
specified number points
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 331
SNGLS
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 332
SP
Frequency Span
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 333
SPEAKER
Turns the internal speaker
on or off
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SPZOOM
Span Zoom
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SQLCH
Sets the squelch threshold
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SQR
Square root
No
No
No
No
SQUELCH
Adjusts squelch level
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SRCALC
Selects internal or external
level control
N/A
N/A
No
No
74
Page 327
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
SRCAT
Attenuate source output
level
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SRCCRSTK
Coarse tracking adjust
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SRCFINTK
Fine tracking adjust
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SRCNORM
Source normalization
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SRCPOFS
Offset source power level
N/A
N/A
No
No
SRCPSTP
Select source power step
size
N/A
N/A
No
No
SRCPSWP
Select sweep range of
source output
N/A
N/A
No
No
SRCPWR
Select source power level
N/A
N/A
No
No
SRCTK
Adjust tracking of source
output with SA sweep
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
SRCTKPK
Auto adjust tracking of
source output with SA
sweep
N/A
N/A
No
No
SRQ
Service request
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 335
SS
Frequency Step Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 336
ST
Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 338
STB
Status byte query
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 340
STDEV
Standard deviation of trace
amplitude
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 341
STOR
Store file
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
STOREOPEN
Save current instrument
state
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
STORESHORT
Store short
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
STORETHRU
Store thru-calibration trace
in trace B
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SUB
Subtract
No
No
No
No
SUM
Sum of trace element
amplitudes in display units
No
No
No
No
SUMSQR
Squares trace element
amplitudes & returns sum
No
No
No
No
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
75
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
SV
Saves state
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 343
SW
Skip to next control
instruction
No
No
N/A
N/A
SWPCPL
Sweep couple
N/A
N/A
No
No
SWPOUT
Sweep output
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
SYNCMODE
Synchronize mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
T0
Turns the threshold level
off
No
No
No
N/A
T1
Sets the trigger mode to
free run
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 344
T2
Sets the trigger mode to
line
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 345
T3
Sets the trigger mode to
external
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 346
T4
Sets the trigger mode to
video
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 347
T7
Sets the trigger mode to
level
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
T8
Sets the trigger mode to
edge
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TA
Returns trace A amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 348
TB
Returns trace B amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 349
TDF
Trace data format
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 350
TEXT
Writes text on the analyzer
screen
No
No
No
No
TH
Threshold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
THE
Turns the threshold on or
off
No
No
N/A
N/A
THEN
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
N/A
No
TIMEDATE
Allows setting of time &
date for analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
76
Page 351
Page 352
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
TIMEDSP
Enables display of time &
data on analyzer display
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TITLE
Title entry
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 353
TM
Trigger Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 354
TOI
Third order
intermodulation
measurement
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TOIR
Third order
intermodulation response
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TRA
Returns trace A amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 355
TRB
Returns trace B amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 356
TRC
Returns trace C amplitude
values to controller
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 357
TRCMEM
Trace C memory
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TRDEF
Trace define
No
No
No
No
TRDSP
Trace display
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
TRGRPH
Trace graph display
No
No
No
N/A
TRIGPOL
Trigger polarity
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
TRMATH
Executes specified trace
math at end of sweep
No
No
No
N/A
TRPRST
Sets trace operations to
their preset values
No
No
Yes
N/A
Page 360
TRSTAT
Returns current trace
states to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 361
TS
Takes a sweep
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 362
TVLINE
Selects which horizontal
line of video to trigger on
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TVLSFRM
Selects the type of video
frame to trigger on
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TVSTND
TV standard
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
TVSYNC
Selects polarity of video
modulation to trigger on
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
Chapter 2
Page for
Further
Details
Page 358
Page 359
77
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Command
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
TWNDOW
Formats trace information
for FFT.
N/A
N/A
No
No
UNTIL
Conditional Programming
(Repeat…Until…)
No
No
N/A
No
UP
Increases active function
value by applicable step
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
UR
Upper right x-y recorder
output voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
N/A
USTATE
Configures user defined
states
No
No
No
N/A
VARDEF
Variable definition
No
No
No
No
VARIANCE
Returns the amplitude
variance of specified trace
No
No
No
No
VAVG
Turns video averaging on or
off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 363
VB
Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 365
VBO
Video Bandwidth Coupling
Offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 367
VBR
Video Bandwidth Ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 368
VIEW
Stores and views the
specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 369
VTL
Video trigger level
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 370
WAIT
Suspend program operation
for specified time
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
WINNEXT
Next window
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
WINOFF
Turns off the window
display mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
WINON
Turns on the window
display mode
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
WINZOOM
Window zoom
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
XCH
Exchanges the two specified
traces.
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
ZMKCNTR
Zone marker at center
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
78
Page for
Further
Details
Page 371
Chapter 2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their
Option 266 Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8590
Series
8560
Series
ZMKPKNL
Zone marker for next peak
left
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ZMKPKNR
Zone marker for next peak
right
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
ZMKSPAN
Zone marker span
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
Page for
Further
Details
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Chapter 2
79
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
80
Chapter 2
3
Hints and Tips
81
Hints and Tips
This chapter includes a list of helpful hints and tips that will help you
get the most from Option 266 on your PSA Series analyzer.
Hints and Tips
A Few Helpful Hints and Tips
A Few Helpful Hints and Tips
These pages lists a few hints and tips that will help you get the most
from your analyzer and Option 266.
• Compatibility - speed and consistency - for best compatibility with
your legacy analyzer, Option 266 should be used on the analyzer
whose frequency range most closely matches the frequency range of
your legacy analyzer. For example, the best match for the 8565E
with its 50 GHz upper frequency limit is the PSA E4448A analyzer
which also has an upper frequency limit of 50 GHz.
• Compatibility and Sweep Times - for best compatibility between PSA
Series analyzers and the legacy analyzers, use the Manual Swept
mode for 8566A/B, 8568A/B, or 8590 Series analyzers. Manual Swept
mode is the default setting on PSA Series analyzers with Option 266
installed.
When analyzing stationary signals, you can change to the Best
Speed setting, which is accessed from the Auto Couple hardkey and
the FFT & Sweep menu. This results in faster sweep times on a PSA
analyzer than on the legacy analyzers because of the PSA’s better
performance. In the majority of applications, this faster speed would
be desirable, but that is not always the case.
When you are using the Best Speed setting, you cannot change the
sweep time manually as the sweep time is always coupled to give the
fastest sweep times based on the current settings.
• Time-out (1) - Agilent suggests that you increase the timeout when
performing MA and MF commands to allow previous marker
functions to complete correctly.
• Time-out (2) - Agilent recommends increasing the timeout on a serial
poll (SPOLL) due to differences in Sweep Times on some settings.
Note, however, that this may not be necessary when using the Best
Speed setting on the FFT & Sweep menu (accessed from the Auto
Couple hardkey).
Hints and Tips
• Synchronization (1) - to synchronize after an IP command, Agilent
recommends that you use the DONE command. We also suggest that
the DONE command is used in conjunction with a timeout of about 5
seconds in case the analyzer starts to auto align. Alternatively, you
could set auto alignment to Off. To set auto alignment to Off, press
System, Alignments, Auto Align on the front panel.
• Synchronization (2) - Agilent recommends that synchronization (using
the DONE command) is used with marker functions when signal
tracking is turned on.
82
Chapter 3
Hints and Tips
A Few Helpful Hints and Tips
•
AC and DC Coupling - The 8568A/B has two RF input ports:
— DC Coupled (with a BNC connector) to handle a frequency range
of 100 Hz to 1.5 GHz
— AC Coupled (with an N Type connector) to handle a frequency
range of 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz
The 8560 Series and the 8590 Series of legacy analyzers only have
one RF input port, and support AC and DC coupling through the
COUPLE command (page 149).
The PSA series analyzers only have a single RF input port.
When using PSA models E4440A, E4443A, and E4445A with the
UKB option, you must use DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies
of less than 10 MHz. Signals of less than 10 MHz are not calibrated
when using AC coupling on these analyzers.
NOTE
PSA models E4446A, E4447A, and E4448A do not allow AC coupling.
• Overloading - if you are overloading the analyzer, connect a 10 dB
attenuator to the RF input and set the Ext Amp Gain (external
amplifier gain) to -10 dB. This softkey is accessed via the Amplitude
hardkey and the More 1 of 3 softkey.
• Instrument Presets - consecutive instrument presets (using the IP
command, that is, issuing a command such as IP;IP;IP;) are not
required.
• SCPI Language - Agilent recommends that you do not repeatedly
swap to and from the SCPI language within your programs.
• GPIB, LAN, and USB Connectivity - Option 266 only works via
the GPIB bus on the PSA. While using Option 266, you can send
SCPI commands using the LAN or USB to the instruments. This
may be helpful to set certain SCPI parameters on the instrument
without the need to turn off the code compatibility application.
Hints and Tips
Chapter 3
83
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
A Few Helpful Hints and Tips
84
Chapter 3
Programming Commands
4
Programming Commands
This chapter lists all the supported 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series, and
8590 Series compatible commands in alphanumeric order, and gives
brief details on their syntax and operation. For more detailed
information on these commands, see your 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560
Series or 8590 Series Operating and Programming Manual.
85
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
Command Syntax
Command Syntax
Command syntax is represented pictorially.
• Ovals enclose command mnemonics. The command mnemonic must
be entered exactly as shown.
• Circles and ovals surround secondary keywords or special numbers
and characters. The characters in circles and ovals are considered
reserved words and must be entered exactly as shown.
• Rectangles contain the description of a syntax element defined in
Table 4-1, “Syntax Elements.”
• A loop above a syntax element indicates that the syntax element can
be repeated.
• Solid lines represent the recommended path.
• Dotted lines indicate an optional path for bypassing secondary
keywords or using alternate units.
• Arrows and curved intersections indicate command path direction.
• Semicolons are the recommended command terminators. Using
semicolons makes programs easier to read, prevents command
misinterpretation, and is recommended by IEEE Standard 728.
NOTE
Uppercase is recommended for entering all commands unless otherwise
noted.
Syntax Elements are shown in the syntax diagrams as elements within
rectangles. In the syntax diagrams, characters and secondary keywords
are shown within circles or ovals. Characters and secondary keywords
must be entered exactly as shown.
86
Chapter 4
Table 4-1
Syntax Elements
Syntax
Component
Definition/Range
Analyzer command
Any spectrum analyzer command in this chapter, with required
parameters and terminators.
Character
SP a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z databyte.
Character & EOI
8-bit byte containing only character data and followed by end-or-identify
(EOI) condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate
the end of the transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Character string
A list of characters.
Data byte
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data.
Data byte & EOI
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data followed by end-or-identify
(EOI) condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate
the end of the transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Delimiter
| \ @ ˆ $ % ; ! Matching characters that mark the beginning and end of a
character string, or a list of spectrum analyzer commands. Choose
delimiting characters that are not used within the string they delimit.
Digit
0123456789
lsb length
Represents the least significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the
number of bytes returned or transmitted. See msb length.
msb length
Represents the most significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the
number of bytes returned or transmitted. See lsb length.
Number
Expressed as integer, decimal, or in exponential (E) form.
Real Number Range: ± 1.797693134862315 × 10308, including 0.
Up to 15 significant figures allowed.
Numbers may be as small as ± 2.225073858507202 × 10−308
Integer Number Range: −32,768 through +32,767
Output
termination
Carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF), with end-or-identify (EOI)
condition. ASCII codes 13 (carriage return) and 10 (line feed) is sent via
GPIB, then the end-or-identify control line on GPIB sets to indicate the
end of the transmission.
Units
Represent standard scientific units.
Frequency Units: GZ, GHZ, MZ, MHZ, KZ, KHZ, HZ
Amplitude Units: DB, DBMV, DM, DBM, DBUV, V, MV, UV
Time Units: SC, S, MS, US
Chapter 4
87
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
Command Syntax
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
Programming Command Descriptions
Programming Command Descriptions
All supported commands are listed here, along with their descriptions
and cross-references to similar commands.
This chapter is not designed to be a comprehensive guide to all
8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series, or 8590 Series commands. It gives brief
descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important
functional or behavioral differences that you should be aware of when
transferring existing 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series or 8590 Series
code to your PSA Series analyzer. For a fuller description of the
commands, refer to the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series or 8590 Series
Operating and Programming Manual.
In the descriptions of the commands, TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB
corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3.
To avoid confusion between numbers and letters, all commands that
incorporate numbers have had the number spelled out and placed in
square brackets after the command. For example, the command ‘I1’ is
shown as ‘I1 [one]’ - that is, the capital letter ‘I’ followed by the number
‘1’, and then the word ‘one’ italicized in square brackets. The italicized
word in brackets does not form part of the command.
88
Chapter 4
A1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace A
Syntax
A1
;
Description
The A1 command sets Trace A to clear write. That is, it continuously
displays any signal present at the spectrum analyzer input. The A1
command initially clears Trace A, setting all elements to zero. The
sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and Trace A is
continually updated as the sweep progresses. Subsequent sweeps send
new amplitude information to the display addresses.
NOTE
The functions of the command A1 are identical to the CLRW TRA
command (page 145).
Chapter 4
89
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
A1 [one] Clear Write for Trace A
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
A2 [two] Maximum Hold for Trace A
A2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace A
Syntax
A2
;
Description
The A2 command updates each trace element with the maximum level
detected during the period that the trace has been active.
NOTE
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA
command (page 287).
90
Chapter 4
A3 [three]
View Mode for Trace A
Syntax
A3
;
Description
The A3 command displays Trace A and then stops the sweep if no other
traces are active. Trace A does not get updated with new data.
NOTE
The functions of the command A3 are identical to the VIEW TRA
command (page 369).
Chapter 4
91
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
A3 [three] View Mode for Trace A
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
A4 [four] Blank Trace A
A4 [four]
Blank Trace A
Syntax
A4
;
Description
The A4 command blanks Trace A and stops the sweep if no other traces
are active. Trace A is not updated.
NOTE
The functions of the command A4 are identical to the BLANK TRA
command (page 130).
92
Chapter 4
ACP
Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACP
;
Description
ACP measures the power of the carrier and the power of the channels
that are adjacent to the carrier, and then computes a power ratio for
each of the adjacent channels, using the carrier power as a reference.
ACP performs the adjacent channel power measurement using the
values for channel spacing (ACPSP) and channel bandwidth (ACPBW).
NOTE
Option 266 supports this measurement using the ANALOG method
only.
Chapter 4
93
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACP Adjacent Channel Power
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPALPHA Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting
ACPALPHA
Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting
Syntax
ACPALPHA
SP
real
;
?
Description
This command sets the alpha weighting for ACP measurements.
Range:
94
Any real number between 0 and 1
Chapter 4
ACPALTCH
Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels
Syntax
ACPALTCH
SP
0
;
1
2
?
Description
The ACPALTCH command sets the number of alternate channels to be
measured by an adjacent channel power measurement to either 0, 1, or
2. The number of alternate channels is used with the ACPRSLTS
command (page 107).
Range:
0, 1, or 2.
Default value: 0.
Chapter 4
95
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPALTCH Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPBRPER Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period
ACPBRPER
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period
Syntax
ACPBRPER
SP
real
S
;
MS
US
SC
?
Description
The ACPBRPER command sets the cycle time (period) of the burst RF
signal. The cycle time is needed to set the sweep times when using the
peak, two bandwidth, burst power, and gated methods for adjacent
channel power measurements.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
96
Chapter 4
ACPBRWID
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width
Syntax
ACPBRWID
SP
real
S
;
MS
US
SC
?
Description
The ACPBRWID command sets the on-time (pulse width) of the burst
RF signal. The pulse width is needed to set the gating times when using
the gated method for adjacent channel power measurements.
Range
NOTE
5 µs to 9.5 seconds
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
97
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPBRWID Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPBW Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth
ACPBW
Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth
Syntax
ACPBW
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Description
The ACPBW command sets the bandwidth of the channels as an active
function for the ACPMEAS (page 103) and ACPCOMPUTE (page 99)
commands. The channel bandwidth cannot be greater than the channel
spacing. If the channel bandwidth is greater than the channel spacing,
the measurement is not performed.
98
Chapter 4
ACPCOMPUTE
Adjacent Channel Power Compute
Syntax
ACPCOMPUTE
;
Description
Calculates the ACP of a transmitter based on data on the display. This
function does not make a new measurement before computing. The
measurement must have been made with ANALOG or PEAK method
selected so the appropriate data is available for the calculation.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
99
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPCOMPUTE Adjacent Channel Power Compute
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPFRQWT Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent Channel Power Frequency
Weighting
Syntax
ACPFRQWT
RRCOS
SP
;
OFF
?
Description
The ACPFRQWT command is used to control the frequency weighting
when making an Adjacent Channel Power measurement. Weighting is
not used in the measurement if OFF has been selected.
Root-raised-cosine weighting is selected with the RRCOS parameter.
Default value: OFF
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
100
Chapter 4
ACPLOWER
Lower Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPLOWER
?
;
Description
The ACPLOWER query command returns the power ratio result of the
Adjacent Channel Power measurement for the lower frequency channel.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
101
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPLOWER Lower Adjacent Channel Power
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPMAX Maximum Adjacent Channel Power
ACPMAX
Maximum Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPMAX
?
;
The ACPMAX query command returns the maximum adjacent channel
power of the adjacent channel power measurement.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
102
Chapter 4
ACPMEAS
Measure Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPMEAS
;
Description
The ACPMEAS command makes a measurement and calculates the
adjacent channel power (ACP) of a transmitter. The measurement
determines the leakage power that is in the channels adjacent to the
carrier. The result is the ratio of the leakage power in the channel
adjacent to the total power transmitted by the transmitter.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
103
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPMEAS Measure Adjacent Channel Power
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPMSTATE Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State
Syntax
ACPMSTATE
CURR
SP
;
DFLT
?
Description
Sets the parameters of the measurement state to either the default
state (determined by the setup) or the current state. The state
parameters that could change between the default state and a current
state include:
• Resolution bandwidth
• Video bandwidth
• Span
• Sweep time
• Detector mode
• Gating parameters
• Trigger parameters
• Video averaging
Default value: DFLT
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
104
Chapter 4
ACPPAR
Adjacent Channel Power Manual or Auto
Syntax
manual
ACPPAR
SP
0
;
auto
1
?
Description
Determines whether the spectrum analyzer settings for the ACP
(page 93), CHP (page 142) or OBW (currently not supported)
measurements are set automatically or manually.
If ACPPAR is set to 1 (automatic), the analyzer does the following
before making the measurement:
• Performs the Trace Preset (TRPRST (page 360)) command.
• Changes Trigger Mode to Free Run.
• Changes Detector Mode to Sample.
• Changes the amplitude scale to 10 dB per division.
• Sets the frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth,
center frequency step size and sweep time based on the channel
spacing (ACPSP (page 108)) and channel bandwidth (ACPBW
(page 98)).
• Takes a sweep
Default value: 1 (auto)
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
105
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPPAR Adjacent Channel Power Manual or Auto
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPPWRTX Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted
ACPPWRTX
Adjacent Channel Power Total Power
Transmitted
Syntax
ACPPWRTX
?
;
Description
The ACPPWRTX query command returns the result of the total power
transmitted calculation of the adjacent channel power measurement.
The measurement must be made with the analog or burst power
method selected.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
106
Chapter 4
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement
Results
Syntax
ACPRSLTS
?
;
Description
Returns an array of power data resulting from an ACP measurement of
an RF signal. The number of alternate channel pairs selected by the
ACPALTCH (page 95) command determines the size of the array.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
107
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPRSLTS Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPSP Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing
ACPSP
Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing
Syntax
ACPSP
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Description
Sets the channel spacing for the ACPMEAS (page 103) and
ACPCOMPUTE (page 99) commands.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
108
Chapter 4
ACPT
Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting
Syntax
ACPT
SP
real
S
;
MS
US
SC
?
Description
The ACPT command is used to set the T used in weighting for an
adjacent channel power measurement.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Chapter 4
109
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPT Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ACPUPPER Upper Adjacent Channel Power
ACPUPPER
Upper Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPUPPER
?
;
Description
The ACPUPPER query command returns the power ratio result of the
adjacent channel power measurement for the upper frequency channel.
NOTE
Option 266 supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
110
Chapter 4
ADJALL
LO and IF Adjustments
Syntax
ADJALL
;
Description
The ADJALL command activates the RF local oscillator (LO) and
intermediate frequency (IF) alignment routines. These are the same
routines that occur when the spectrum analyzer is switched on. They
are also the same routines that are performed when you press System,
Alignments, Align Now, All.
Commands following ADJALL are not executed until after the analyzer
has finished the alignment routines.
Chapter 4
111
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ADJALL LO and IF Adjustments
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AMB A minus B into A
AMB
A minus B into A
Syntax
AMB
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
The AMB command subtracts the points in Trace B from the
corresponding points in Trace A, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus,
AMB can restore the original trace after an APB (page 116) or a KSc
(page 193) command has been executed.
The query command AMB? returns different responses depending on
the language being used. The 8560 Series languages return either a 1 or
a 0 to indicate the On or Off status. The 8566, 8568, and the 8590 Series
languages all return either ON or OFF.
NOTE
On the legacy analyzers, the AMB command operates continuously.
That is, it continuously updates Trace A to display the results of Trace
A minus Trace B until AMB is switched off.
This is not the case with Option 266 - Code Compatibility. The AMB
command is performed once only, using the trace data available at the
time of execution.
NOTE
The functions of the command AMB are identical to the C2 [two]
command (page 135).
112
Chapter 4
AMBPL
(A minus B) plus Display Line into A
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
AMBPL
;
8560 Series and 8590 Series Remote Language
AMBPL
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
The AMBPL command does a point-by-point subtraction of Trace B
from Trace A, and then adds the display line point values to the
difference. The results are sent to Trace A.
NOTE
On the legacy analyzers, the AMBPL command operates continuously.
That is, it continuously updates Trace A to display the results of Trace
A minus Trace B until AMBPL is switched off.
This is not the case with Option 266 - Code Compatibility. The AMBPL
command is performed once only, using the trace data available at the
time of execution.
Chapter 4
113
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AMBPL (A minus B) plus Display Line into A
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AMBPL (A minus B) plus Display Line into A
NOTE
The query command AMBPL? returns different responses depending on
the language being used.
8560 Series
Query response is either 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF
state.
8566A
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8566B
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8568A
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8568B
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8590 Series
Query response is either ON or OFF.
114
Chapter 4
ANNOT
Annotation
Syntax
ANNOT
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Preset State: ANNOT ON
Description
The ANNOT command turns on or off all annotation on the spectrum
analyzer display. Softkey labels are not affected by this command and
remain displayed.
NOTE
The functions of the command ANNOT are identical to the KSo
command (page 215) and KSp command (page 216). Note also that
these two alternative commands, KSo and KSp, are only valid when the
remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
Chapter 4
115
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ANNOT Annotation
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
APB Trace A Plus Trace B to A
APB
Trace A Plus Trace B to A
Syntax
APB
;
Description
The APB command does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace
B, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, APB can restore the original
trace after an AMB (page 112) or a C2 (page 135) command has been
executed.
NOTE
The functions of the command APB are identical to the KSc command
(page 193). Note also that the alternative command, KSc, is only valid
when the remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or
HP8568B.
NOTE
On the legacy analyzers, the AMB command operates continuously.
That is, it continuously updates Trace A to display the results of Trace
A minus Trace B until AMB is switched off.
This is not the case with Option 266 - Code Compatibility. The AMB
command is performed once only, using the trace data available at the
time of execution.
116
Chapter 4
AT
Input Attenuation
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
AT
SP
number
DB
;
DB
;
DB
;
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
MAN
OA
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
AT
SP
number
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
8590 Series Remote Language
AT
SP
number
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
OA
?
Chapter 4
117
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AT Input Attenuation
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AT Input Attenuation
Table 4-2
Item
Description/Default
Number
Any real number or
integer. If the value
you enter is not a valid
value for the analyzer
you are using, it will
switch automatically to
the closest valid
setting. Default units
are dB.
Range
0 to 70 dB specified absolutely
and
10 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps
Preset State: 10 dB
Step Increment: 10 dB
Description
Specifies the RF input attenuation.
Although any attenuation level from 0 dB to 70 dB in PSA series
analyzers can be specified using absolute values, you can never set
attenuation below 10 dB using the DOWN steps. This is a safety
feature to prevent inadvertent setting of attenuation to a level that
could damage the analyzer.
CAUTION
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the spectrum analyzer.
NOTE
You cannot step down below 10 dB. To set levels below 10 dB, you must
specify the attenuation absolutely. For example, to set attenuation to 0
dB, you must use the command AT 0DB.
118
Chapter 4
AUNITS
Absolute Amplitude Units
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
AUNITS
AUTO
SP
;
MAN
DBM
DBMV
DBUV
V
W
DM
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
AUNITS
DBM
SP
;
DBMV
DBUV
V
?
8590 Series Remote Language
AUNITS
DBM
SP
;
DBMV
DBUV
V
W
?
Description
Specifies the amplitude readout units for the reference level, the
marker, and the display line.
Chapter 4
119
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AUNITS Absolute Amplitude Units
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AUNITS Absolute Amplitude Units
NOTE
If your selected remote language is any of the 8560 Series and you use
either the AUTO or the MAN parameter, a warning will be displayed
informing you that the command is not supported with either of these
parameters.
NOTE
The functions of the command AUNITS are identical to the commands
KSA (page 188), KSB (page 190), KSC (page 192), and KSD (page 194).
Note also that these four alternative commands, KSA, KSB, KSC, and
KSD are only valid when the remote language is either HP8566A,
HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
120
Chapter 4
AUTO
Auto Couple
Syntax
KEYWORD
SP
AUTO
;
Description
The AUTO command couples the active functions automatically.
Sending the command HD; AUTO will cause all functions to be auto
coupled.
NOTE
On the legacy analyzers, if the currently active function is not
represented by one of the keywords listed below when the command
AUTO is executed, all functions are auto coupled. If the active function
is represented by one of the keywords below, only that function is auto
coupled.
This does not happen with Option 266 Programming Code
Compatibility Suite on the PSA Series analyzers because they do not
recognize active functions.
Keywords Used in the Command
AT
Couples attenuation to the reference level.
DL
Turns the display line off but does not change the value
of the line.
MKA
Turns the marker off.
MKD
Turns the delta marker off. It does not turn the current
marker off.
MKFCR
Deactivates the use of user-supplied counter resolution
value, but the value remains unchanged.
MKN
Turns the marker off.
RB
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the frequency
span.
SRCPSTP
Sets the source power step to 0 (zero).
SRCPSWP
Turns power sweep off.
SCRPWR
Turns source power off.
SS
Couples the step size to the frequency span.
Chapter 4
121
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AUTO Auto Couple
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AUTO Auto Couple
ST
Couples the sweep time to the frequency span.
TH
Turns the display of the threshold off, but does not
change its value or prevent its usage in peak searching.
VAVG
Stops averaging.
VB
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution
bandwidth.
VBR
Sets the video to bandwidth ratio to 0.3.
122
Chapter 4
AUTOCPL
Auto Coupled
Syntax
AUTOCPL
;
Description
Sets video bandwidth, resolution bandwidth, input attenuation, sweep
time and center frequency step-size to coupled mode.
Chapter 4
123
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AUTOCPL Auto Coupled
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
AXB Exchange Trace A and Trace B
AXB
Exchange Trace A and Trace B
Syntax
AXB
;
Description
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
NOTE
The functions of the command AXB are identical to the EX command
(page 171) and to the XCH TRA,TRB command (page 371).
124
Chapter 4
B1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace B
Syntax
B1
;
Description
The B1 command sets Trace B to clear write. That is, it continuously
displays any signal present at the spectrum analyzer input. The B1
command initially clears Trace B, setting all elements to zero. The
sweep trigger then signals the start of the sweep, and Trace B is
continually updated as the sweep progresses. Subsequent sweeps send
new amplitude information to the display addresses.
NOTE
The functions of the command B1 are identical to the CLRW TRB
command (page 145).
Chapter 4
125
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
B1 [one] Clear Write for Trace B
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
B2 [two] Maximum Hold for Trace B
B2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace B
Syntax
B2
;
Description
The B2 command updates each trace element with the maximum level
detected while the trace is active.
NOTE
The functions of the command B2 are identical to the MXMH TRB
command (page 287).
126
Chapter 4
B3 [three]
View Mode for Trace B
Syntax
B3
;
Description
The B3 command displays Trace B and then stops the sweep if no other
traces are active. Trace B does not get updated.
NOTE
The functions of the command B3 are identical to the VIEW TRB
command (page 369).
Chapter 4
127
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
B3 [three] View Mode for Trace B
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
B4 [four] Blank Trace B
B4 [four]
Blank Trace B
Syntax
B4
;
Description
The B4 command blanks Trace B and stops the sweep if no other traces
are active. Trace B is not updated.
NOTE
The functions of the command B4 are identical to the BLANK TRB
command (page 130).
128
Chapter 4
BL
Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B
Syntax
BL
;
Description
The BL command subtracts the display line from Trace B and sends the
results to Trace B.
NOTE
NOTE
The command BL is calculated differently depending on the language
being used.
8560 Series
The calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8566A
The calculation is performed in display units.
8566B
The calculation is performed in display units.
8568A
The calculation is performed in display units.
8568B
The calculation is performed in display units.
8590 Series
The calculation is performed in display units.
The functions of the command BL are identical to the BML command
(page 131).
Chapter 4
129
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
BL Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
BLANK Blank Trace
BLANK
Blank Trace
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
BLANK
SP
TRA
;
TRB
8566, 8568, and 8590 Series Remote Language
BLANK
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Preset State: BLANK TRB, BLANK TRC
Description
Blanks Trace 1, trace 2, or trace 3, and stops taking new data into the
specified trace. TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace
2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3.
NOTE
The functions of the command BLANK are identical to the A4 command
(page 92), the B4 command (page 128), and KSk command (page 206).
130
Chapter 4
BML
Trace B Minus Display Line
Syntax
BML
;
Description
The BML command subtracts the display line from trace B (point by
point), and sends the difference to trace B. Trace B corresponds to
Trace 2.
NOTE
Remote language 8560 - the BML command is performed in dBm units.
Remote languages 8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, 8568B, and the 8590
Series - the BML command is performed in display units.
NOTE
The functions of the command BML are identical to the BL command
(page 129).
Chapter 4
131
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
BML Trace B Minus Display Line
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
BTC Transfer Trace B to Trace C
BTC
Transfer Trace B to Trace C
Syntax
BTC
;
Description
The BTC command transfers Trace B data to Trace C
NOTE
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C
cannot be updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current
settings of the analyzer are reflected in the data transferred from Trace
B to Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
• Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
• Select the desired analyzer settings
• Take one complete sweep
• Transfer the data
NOTE
The functions of the command BTC are identical to the KSl command
(page 208).
132
Chapter 4
BXC
Exchange Trace B and Trace C
Syntax
BXC
;
Description
The BXC command exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
NOTE
Trace C must not be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace
C cannot be updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current
settings of the analyzer are reflected in the data exchanged between
Trace B and Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
• Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
• Select the desired analyzer settings
• Take one complete sweep
• Exchange the data
NOTE
The functions of the command BXC are identical to the KSi command
(page 203) and to the XCH TRB,TRC command (page 371).
Chapter 4
133
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
BXC Exchange Trace B and Trace C
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
C1 [one] Set A Minus B Mode Off
C1 [one]
Set A Minus B Mode Off
Syntax
C1
;
Description
The C1 command turns the A Minus B mode off. That is, it switches off
the functionality that was switched on by the C2 command (page 135)
or by the AMB ON command (page 112).
NOTE
The functions of the command C1 are identical to the AMB OFF
command (page 112).
134
Chapter 4
C2 [two]
A Minus B Into A
Syntax
C2
;
Description
The C2 command subtracts the points in Trace B from the
corresponding points in Trace A, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus,
if your input signal remains unchanged, C2 can restore the original
trace after an APB command (page 116) or a KSc (page 193) command
has been executed.
NOTE
The functions of the command C2 are identical to the AMB ON
command (page 112).
NOTE
On the legacy analyzers, the C2 command operates continuously. That
is, it continuously updates Trace A to display the results of Trace A
minus Trace B until C2 is switched off by issuing the C1 command.
This is not the case with Option 266 - Programming Code Compatibility.
The C2 command is performed once only, using the trace data available
at the time of execution.
Chapter 4
135
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
C2 [two] A Minus B Into A
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CA Couple Attenuation
CA
Couple Attenuation
Syntax
CA
;
Description
During normal operation, the spectrum analyzer’s input attenuation is
coupled to the reference level. This coupling keeps the mixer input at a
level such that a continuous wave signal displayed at the reference
level is at or below -10 dBm (or the value specified in the ML command.)
The CA command sets the threshold to -10 dBm (or to the value
specified by the ML command (page 283) or the KS, command
(page 186)). The counterpart to the CA command is the AT command
(page 117), which allows levels less than the threshold value at the
mixer input.
136
Chapter 4
CAL
Calibration
Syntax
CAL
ALL
;
Description
Calibrates the logarithmic and step gain amplifiers, the attenuator and
the amplitude and frequency of the resolution bandwidth filters.
Chapter 4
137
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CAL Calibration
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CARRON Carrier On Power
CARRON
Carrier On Power
Syntax
CARRON
SP
TRA
,
?
;
TRB
Description
Measures the average power of the carrier during the portion of time
when it is on and within 20dB of its peak level.
138
Chapter 4
CF
Center Frequency
Syntax
CF
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
SP
UP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-3
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is HZ.
Range
Frequency range of the
spectrum analyzer
Description
The CF command specifies the value of the center frequency.
The step size depends on whether the frequency has been coupled to the
span width using the CS command (page 151). When coupled, the step
size is 10% of the span, or one major graticule division; when
uncoupled, the step size is determined by the SS command (page 336).
NOTE
Although the spectrum analyzer allows entry of frequencies not in the
specified frequency range, using frequencies outside the frequency span
of the spectrum analyzer is not recommended and is not warranted to
meet specifications.
Chapter 4
139
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CF Center Frequency
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CHANNEL Channel Selection
CHANNEL
Channel Selection
Syntax
CHANNEL
SP
UP
;
DN
Description
Increments or decrements the spectrum analyzer center frequency by
one channel spacing.
NOTE
The channel spacing value is set using the ACPSP command
(page 108).
140
Chapter 4
CHANPWR
Channel Power
Syntax
CHANPWR
SP
TRA
TRB
,
real
HZ
,
?
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
Description
Measures the power within the specified channel bandwidth.
NOTE
If no channel bandwidth is specified in the command, the channel
bandwidth is set using the CHPWRBR command (page 143).
Chapter 4
141
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CHANPWR Channel Power
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CHP Channel Power
CHP
Channel Power
Syntax
CHP
;
Description
The CHP command performs the channel power measurement.
NOTE
The channel bandwidth is set with the ACPBW command (page 98).
Channel spacing is set with the ACPSP command (page 108).
142
Chapter 4
CHPWRBW
Channel Power Bandwidth
Syntax
CHPWRBW
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
SP
UP
DN
OA
?
Description
Queries or sets the current value of the channel power bandwidth.
Channel power can be measured with the CHANPWR command
(page 141).
Chapter 4
143
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CHPWRBW Channel Power Bandwidth
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CLRAVG Clear Average
CLRAVG
Clear Average
Syntax
CLRAVG
;
Description
The command restarts the VAVG command by resetting the number of
averaged sweeps to one. The video averaging routine resets the number
of sweeps, but does not stop video averaging. Use “VAVG OFF;” to stop
video averaging.
144
Chapter 4
CLRW
Clear Write
Clears the specified trace and enables trace data acquisition.
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
CLRW
SP
TRA
;
TRB
8566, 8568, and 8590 Series Remote Language
CLRW
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Preset State: CLRW TRA
Description
The CLRW command places the indicated trace in clear-write mode.
Data acquisition begins at the next sweep. (See the TS command
(page 362) for more information about data acquisition.)
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
NOTE
The functions of the command CLRW are identical to the A1 command
(page 89) and B1 command (page 125).
Chapter 4
145
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CLRW Clear Write
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CLS Clear Status Byte
CLS
Clear Status Byte
Syntax
CLS
;
Description
Clears all the status bits from the status byte.
146
Chapter 4
CONTS
Continuous Sweep
Syntax
CONTS
;
Preset State: CONTS
Description
The CONTS command sets the spectrum analyzer to continuous sweep
mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the spectrum analyzer takes its
next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the
trigger conditions are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by
data entries made over the remote interface or from the front panel.
NOTE
The functions of the command CONTS are identical to the S1 command
(page 320).
Chapter 4
147
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CONTS Continuous Sweep
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CORREK Correction Factors On
CORREK
Correction Factors On
Syntax
CORREK
SP
?
;
Description
The CORREK command queries the state of the analyzer frequency
corrections. It returns a “1” if the correction factors are on, a “0” if they
are off.
148
Chapter 4
COUPLE
Input Coupling
Syntax
COUPLE
SP
AC
;
DC
?
Description
The COUPLE command selects AC or DC coupling.
NOTE
PSA models E4446A, E4447A, and E4448A do not allow AC coupling.
Chapter 4
149
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
COUPLE Input Coupling
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CR Couple Resolution Bandwidth
CR
Couple Resolution Bandwidth
Syntax
CR
;
Description
The CR command couples the resolution bandwidth to the video
bandwidth and to the sweep time.
The counterpart to the CR command is the RB command (page 309)
which breaks the coupling. Use the CR command to re-establish
coupling after executing an RB command.
NOTE
CR uses the coupling settings from the PSA analyzer. These may differ
from the settings that you would have seen on the legacy analyzer being
emulated here.
150
Chapter 4
CS
Couple Frequency Step Size
Syntax
CS
;
Description
The CS command couples the center frequency step size to the span
width so that the step size equals 10% of the span width, or one major
graticule division.
The counterpart to the CS command is the SS command (page 336)
which breaks the coupling. Use the CS command to re-establish
coupling after an SS command has been executed.
Chapter 4
151
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CS Couple Frequency Step Size
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CT Couple Sweep Time
CT
Couple Sweep Time
Syntax
CT
;
Description
The CT command couples the sweep time to the span, resolution
bandwidth and video bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CT command is the ST command (page 338)
which breaks the coupling. Use the CT command to re-establish
coupling after an ST command has been executed.
152
Chapter 4
CV
Couple Video Bandwidth
Syntax
CV
;
Description
The CV command couples the video bandwidth to the resolution
bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CV command is the VB command (page 365)
which breaks the coupling. Use the CV command to re-establish
coupling after executing a VB command.
NOTE
CV uses the coupling settings from the PSA analyzer. These may differ
from the settings that you would have seen on the legacy analyzer being
emulated here.
Chapter 4
153
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
CV Couple Video Bandwidth
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DA Display Address
DA
Display Address
Syntax
DA
SP
number
;
Description
The DA command returns the contents of the given display address to
the controller
NOTE
This command only supports the use of the DA 1, DA 1025, and DA
3073; these display addresses contain the trace data and are equivalent
to using the commands TRA? (page 355), TRB? (page 356), TRC?
(page 357), TA (page 348) and TB (page 349).
154
Chapter 4
DELMKBW
Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta
Marker
Syntax
DELMKBW
SP
TRA
,
real
,
?
;
TRB
Description
Calculates the OBW with respect to the power between the displayed
delta markers. The power between the displayed markers is then used
as the reference, rather than using the total power in the frequency
span as is done in the PWRBW (page 301) command.
NOTE
If the DELMKBW command is used when no marker is active, a delta
marker is activated at the center frequency, and the returned
bandwidth is 0. If the active marker is a normal marker when the
DELMKBW command is used, the marker type is changed to delta, and
the returned bandwidth is 0.
Chapter 4
155
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DELMKBW Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DET Detection Mode
DET
Detection Mode
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
DET
POS
SP
;
SMP
NEG
NRM
QPD
EPK
MPK
AVG
AVE
AUTO
MAN
?
8560 Series Remote Language
DET
POS
SP
;
SMP
NEG
NRM
?
8590 SeriesRemote Language
DET
POS
SP
;
SMP
NEG
?
Preset State: DET NRM
Description
The DET command selects the type of spectrum analyzer detection
(positive-peak, negative peak, sample, normal, and so on).
156
Chapter 4
NOTE
POS
enables positive-peak detection, which displays the
maximum video signal detected over a number of
instantaneous samples for a particular frequency.
SMP
enables sample detection, which uses the
instantaneous video signal value. Video averaging and
noise-level markers, when activated, activate sample
detection automatically.
NEG
enables negative peak detection in sweep times of less
than or equal to 200 ms.
NRM
enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that
selectively chooses between positive and negative
values.
QPD
enables quasi-peak detection for EMC measurements.
EPK
enables EMI peak detection for EMC measurements.
MPK
enables MIL peak detection to meet military
specifications when making EMC measurements.
AVG
enables EMI average detection for EMC
measurements.
AVE
enables average peak detection (non-EMC
measurements).
AUTO
sets the detector function selection to auto.
MAN
sets the detector function selection to manual.
The functions of the DET command are identical to the KSa command
(page 189), the KSb command (page 191), the KSd command
(page 195), the KSe command (page 197), the Q0 command (page 303),
and the Q1 command (page 304).
Chapter 4
157
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DET Detection Mode
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DL Display Line
DL
Display Line
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
DL
SP
number
;
UP
DN
OA
?
8590 Series and 8590 Series Remote Language
DL
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
SP
UP
DBMV
DN
DBUV
OFF
MV
ON
UV
V
MW
UW
W
DM
?
Table 4-4
Item
Description/Default
NUMBER
Any real or integer
number. Default units are
dBm.
158
Range
Dependent on the reference
level
Chapter 4
Preset State: DL OFF
Step Increment: 1 major graticule division
Description
Defines the level of the display line and displays it on the spectrum
analyzer screen.
Chapter 4
159
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DL Display Line
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DLE Display Line Enable
DLE
Display Line Enable
Syntax
DLE
SP
ON
;
OFF
?
Description
The DLE command enables or disables the display line.
160
Chapter 4
DLYSWP
Delay Sweep
Syntax
DLYSWP
SP
number
US
;
MS
SC
S
ON
SP
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
Delays the start of the sweep until the specified time after the trigger
event has elapsed.
NOTE
A query response of 0 indicates that DLYSWP is switched off.
Chapter 4
161
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DLYSWP Delay Sweep
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
DONE Done
DONE
Done
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
TS
Command
List
DONE
;
8590 Series and 8590 Series
DONE
?
;
Description
Allows you to determine when the spectrum analyzer has parsed a list
of spectrum analyzer commands and has executed all commands prior
to and including DONE. The DONE command returns a value of “1”
when all commands in a command string or command list have been
completed.
If a take sweep (TS command (page 362)) precedes the command list,
the TS command acts as a synchronizing function since the command
list execution begins after the sweep has been completed.
162
Chapter 4
E1[one]
Peak Marker
Syntax
E1
;
Description
The E1 command positions the marker at the signal peak.
NOTE
The functions of the E1 command are identical to MKPK (no secondary
keyword) and MKPK HI (page 270).
Chapter 4
163
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
E1[one] Peak Marker
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
E2 [two] Marker to Center Frequency
E2 [two]
Marker to Center Frequency
Syntax
E2
;
Description
The E2 command positions the marker on the screen at the center
frequency position.
NOTE
The functions of the E2 command are identical to the MKCF command
(page 258).
164
Chapter 4
E3 [three]
Delta Marker Step Size
Syntax
E3
;
Description
The E3 command establishes the center frequency step size as being
the frequency difference between the delta marker and the active
marker.
NOTE
The functions of the E3 command are identical to the MKSS command
(page 277).
Chapter 4
165
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
E3 [three] Delta Marker Step Size
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
E4 [four] Marker to Reference Level
E4 [four]
Marker to Reference Level
Syntax
E4
;
Description
The E4 command moves the active marker to the reference level.
NOTE
The functions of the E4 command are identical to the MKRL command
(page 275).
166
Chapter 4
EDITDONE
End of Limit Line Edits
Syntax
EDITDONE
;
Description
The EDITDONE command is used at the completion of limit-line
editing within the EDITLIML command (page 168).
Chapter 4
167
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
EDITDONE End of Limit Line Edits
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
EDITLIML Edit Limit Line
EDITLIML
Edit Limit Line
Syntax
EDITLIML
;
Description
The EDITLIML command turns the currently active limit line off, and
puts the analyzer into limit-line edit mode.
168
Chapter 4
ERR
Error
Syntax
ERR
?
;
Description
The ERR command returns an integer list of error codes to the
controller.
Chapter 4
169
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ERR Error
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ET Elapsed Time
ET
Elapsed Time
Syntax
ET
?
;
Description
The ET command returns to the controller the elapsed time (in hours)
of analyzer operation.
170
Chapter 4
EX
Exchange Trace A and Trace B
Syntax
EX
;
Description
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
NOTE
The functions of the EX command are identical to the AXB command
(page 124) and to the XCH TRA,TRB command (page 371).
Chapter 4
171
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
EX Exchange Trace A and Trace B
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FA Start Frequency
FA
Start Frequency
Syntax
FA
SP
HZ
real
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-5
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is Hz.
Range
Frequency range of the
spectrum analyzer
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10
Description
The FA command specifies the start frequency value. The start
frequency is equal to the center frequency minus (the span divided by
two) (FA = CF − SP/2). Changing the start frequency changes the center
frequency and span.
NOTE
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It
does not set the active function to the start frequency.
172
Chapter 4
FB
Stop Frequency
Syntax
FB
SP
HZ
real
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-6
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is Hz.
Range
Frequency range of the
spectrum analyzer
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10
Description
The FB command specifies the stop frequency value. The stop frequency
is equal to the center frequency plus the span divided by two (FB = CF +
SP/2). Changing the stop frequency changes the center frequency and
span.
NOTE
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It
does not set the active function to the stop frequency.
Chapter 4
173
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FB Stop Frequency
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FDSP Frequency Display Off
FDSP
Frequency Display Off
Syntax
FDSP
OFF
SP
;
?
Description
The FDSP command turns the frequency annotation OFF.
NOTE
It is not possible enable or disable the frequency annotation alone,
leaving other annotation unaffected. Thus, the FDSP command
behaves in the same way as ANNOT (page 115) If the FDSP command
has been used to disable the frequency annotation, sending the ANNOT
ON command will not re-enable the display annotation. The display
annotation will only be displayed by sending the IP (page 185)
command.
174
Chapter 4
FOFFSET
Frequency Offset
Syntax
FOFFSET
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-7
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Range
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is Hz.
Preset State: 0 Hz
Description
The FOFFSET command selects a value that offsets the frequency scale
for all absolute frequency readouts (for example, center frequency).
Relative values such as span and marker delta are not offset.
When an offset is in effect, it is displayed beneath the bottom graticule
line on the spectrum analyzer screen.
Execute “FOFFSET 0;” or “IP;” to turn off the offset.
NOTE
The functions of the FOFFSET command are identical to the KSV
command (page 218).
Chapter 4
175
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FOFFSET Frequency Offset
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FPKA Fast Preselector Peak
FPKA
Fast Preselector Peak
Syntax
FPKA
;
Description
The FPKA command automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to
yield the greatest signal level at the active marker. It returns the
amplitude of the active marker.
NOTE
The FPKA command is only available when the analyzer’s upper
frequency limit is greater than 3 GHz. The command is not supported
in analyzers with an upper frequency limit of 3 GHz or less, and will
return an error message when used.
176
Chapter 4
FREF
Frequency Reference
Syntax
FREF
INT
SP
;
EXT
?
Description
The FREF command specifies whether an external source or an
internal source is being used.
Chapter 4
177
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FREF Frequency Reference
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FS Full Span
FS
Full Span
Syntax
FS
;
Description
The FS command sets the frequency span of the spectrum analyzer to
full span. Resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, and sweep time are
all set to auto-coupled.
NOTE
The functions of the FS command are identical to the LF command
(page 223).
NOTE
Whenever the frequency range of the analyzer you are using does not
match the remote language’s own range, the span will be limited by the
capabilities of the analyzer. The tables on the following pages list the
frequency ranges for all the supported remote languages when running
on any of Agilent’s PSA Series of analyzers.
178
Chapter 4
Table 4-8
PSA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
E4440A
E4443A
E4445A
E4446A
E4447A
E4448A
Remote
Frequency
Language Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
Frequency
Range
8560E
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz- 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 6.7 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E
0 Hz - 26.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.7 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz -26.5 GHz 0 Hz -26.5 GHz
8564E
0 Hz - 26.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.7 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 40.0 GHz 0 Hz - 40.0 GHz 0 Hz - 40.0 GHz
8565E
0 Hz - 26.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.7 GHz 0 Hz - 13.2 GHz 0 Hz - 44.0 GHz 0 Hz - 42.98 GHz 0 Hz - 50.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz 0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz 0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8590L
0 Hz - 1.8 GHz
0 Hz - 1.8 GHz 0 Hz - 1.8 GHz 0 Hz - 1.8 GHz 0 Hz - 1.8 GHz
0 Hz - 1.8 GHz
8591E
0 Hz - 1.8 GHz
0 Hz - 1.8 GHz 0 Hz - 1.8 GHz 0 Hz - 1.8 GHz 0 Hz - 1.8 GHz
0 Hz - 1.8 GHz
8592La
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
2.75 GHz 6.7 GHz
2.75 GHz 13.2 GHz
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
8593Ea
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
2.75 GHz 6.7 GHz
2.75 GHz 13.2 GHz
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
2.75 GHz 22.0 GHz
8594E
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz 0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8595E
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz 0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8596Ea
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.7 GHz 0 Hz - 12.8 GHz 0 Hz - 12.8 GHz 0 Hz - 12.8 GHz 0 Hz - 12.8 GHz
0 Hz - 26.5 GHz
a. The command HNLOCK (Harmonic Lock) is not supported in Option 266. Thus, the
different frequency spans associated with the various harmonic bands are also not
supported.
Chapter 4
179
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
FS Full Span
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
GRAT Graticule
GRAT
Graticule
Syntax
GRAT
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Preset State: GRAT ON
Description
Turns the graticule on or off.
NOTE
The functions of the GRAT command are identical to the KSm
command (page 211) and the KSn command (page 213).
NOTE
The query command GRAT? returns different responses depending on
the language being used.
8560 Series
Query response is either 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF
state.
8566A
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8566B
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8568A
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8568B
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8590 Series
Query response is either ON or OFF.
180
Chapter 4
HD
Hold Data Entry
Syntax
HD
AUTO
;
Description
Disables data entry via the spectrum analyzer numeric keypad, knob,
or step keys. The active function readout is blanked, and any active
function is deactivated.
NOTE
This command will only be supported when followed by the parameter
AUTO (page 121). All functions will then be auto-coupled.
Chapter 4
181
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
HD Hold Data Entry
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
I1 [one] Set RF Coupling to DC
I1 [one]
Set RF Coupling to DC
Syntax
I1
;
Description
The I1 [one] command sets the RF coupling to DC if your analyzer is
capable of being switched. If your analyzer cannot be switched to DC
coupling, the command will have no effect but an error message will not
be generated.
Whether or not your analyzer can be AC coupled, DC coupled, or both
depends on both the analyzer’s model number, and on whether or not
Option UKB (Low Frequency Extension) has been installed. The tables
below list the frequency specifications for all PSA analyzers for both DC
and AC coupling.
Table 4-9
Table 4-10
NOTE
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
PSA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(PSA series)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
E4440A
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
E4443A
3 Hz
6.7 GHz
10 MHz
6.7 GHz
E4445A
3 Hz
13.2 GHz
10 MHz
13.2 GHz
E4446A
3 Hz
44 GHz
N/A
N/A
E4447A
3 Hz
42.98 GHz
N/A
N/A
E4448A
3 Hz
50 GHz
N/A
N/A
The PSA Series analyzers only have a single RF input port.
182
Chapter 4
I2 [two]
Set RF Coupling to AC
Syntax
I2
;
Description
The I2 [two] command sets the RF coupling to AC if your analyzer is
capable of being switched. If your analyzer cannot be switched to AC
coupling, the command will have no effect but an error message will not
be generated.
Whether or not your analyzer can be AC coupled, DC coupled, or both
depends on both the analyzer’s model number, and on whether or not
Option UKB (Low Frequency Extension) has been installed. The tables
below list the frequency specifications for both DC and AC coupling.
Table 4-11
Table 4-12
NOTE
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
PSA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(PSA series)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
E4440A
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
E4443A
3 Hz
6.7 GHz
10 MHz
6.7 GHz
E4445A
3 Hz
13.2 GHz
10 MHz
13.2 GHz
E4446A
3 Hz
44 GHz
N/A
N/A
E4447A
3 Hz
42.98 GHz
N/A
N/A
E4448A
3 Hz
50 GHz
N/A
N/A
The PSA Series analyzers only have a single RF input port.
Chapter 4
183
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
I2 [two] Set RF Coupling to AC
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ID Identify
ID
Identify
Syntax
ID
?
;
Description
The ID command returns the current model number of the spectrum
analyzer to the controller.
If you are in SA mode, the response value is determined by your remote
language selection. If you have a legacy language selected, the model
number of the emulated instrument will be returned (for example,
“HP8563E”). If you have SCPI selected, the model number of you PSA
will be returned (for example, “E4440”).
If you are in any other mode, the response value will be the model
number of your PSA regardless of the remote language selection.
The remote language is configured using the front-panel menu selection
(System, Config I/O, Configure Remote Lang) and can also be set using the
SCPI command SYSTem:LANGuage.
For more information see:
“Configuring Option 266 on PSA Analyzers” on page 37
“Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands” on page 45
184
Chapter 4
IP
Instrument Preset
Syntax
IP
;
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the analyzer back to its factory
settings.
Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the spectrum
analyzer. IP is a good starting point for many measurement processes.
When IP is executed remotely, the spectrum analyzer does not
necessarily execute a complete sweep, however. You should execute a
take sweep (TS) to ensure that the trace data is valid after an IP.
NOTE
The functions of the IP command are identical to the KST command
(page 217).
NOTE
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing an IP command
will not reset this value. This is to protect the analyzer.
Chapter 4
185
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
IP Instrument Preset
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KS, Mixer Level
KS,
Mixer Level
Syntax
KS,
SP
real
DM
;
MV
UV
OA
?
Description
The KS, command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to
the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input
attenuator setting. When KS, is activated, the effective mixer level can
be set from -10 dBm to -70 dBm in 10 dB steps.
As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator
automatically changes to limit the maximum signal at the mixer input
to your specified setting for signals less than or equal to the reference
level.
NOTE
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing an IP command
will not reset this value. This is to protect the analyzer.
NOTE
The functions of the KS, command are identical to the ML command
(page 283).
186
Chapter 4
KS=
Marker Counter Resolution
Syntax
KS=
SP
real
HZ
;
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
NOTE
The marker counter can be specified in time units when operating in
the time domain.
Description
Specifies the resolution of the marker frequency counter.
NOTE
The functions of the KS= command are identical to the MKFCR
command (page 263).
NOTE
On PSA analyzers, setting the marker frequency resolution will cause
the Gate Time to change. The Gate Time is calculated using the
following formula:
1
Gate Time = ----------------------------------------Resolution Value
For restrictions on the Gate Time, refer to the PSA User’s and
Programmer’s Reference, Volume 1.
NOTE
This command is only supported in the 8568 remote language. The
same KS= command has a different function (selects the factory
preselector setting) in the 8566 language, and is not supported.
Chapter 4
187
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KS= Marker Counter Resolution
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSA Amplitude in dBm
KSA
Amplitude in dBm
Syntax
KSA
;
Description
The KSA command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker,
display line and threshold) to dBm units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSA command are identical to the AUNITS DBM
command (page 119).
188
Chapter 4
KSa
Normal Detection
Syntax
KSa
;
Description
The KSa command selects normal input detection. That is, it enables
the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that selectively chooses between
positive and negative values.
NOTE
The functions of the KSa command are identical to the DET NRM
command (page 156).
Chapter 4
189
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSa Normal Detection
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSB Amplitude in dBmV
KSB
Amplitude in dBmV
Syntax
KSB
;
Description
The KSB command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker,
display line and threshold) to dBmV units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSB command are identical to the AUNITS DBMV
command (page 119).
190
Chapter 4
KSb
Positive Peak Detection
Syntax
KSB
;
Description
The KSb command enables positive peak input detection for displaying
trace information. Trace elements are only updated when the detected
signal level is greater than the previous signal level.
NOTE
The functions of the KSb command are identical to the DET POS
command (page 156).
Chapter 4
191
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSb Positive Peak Detection
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSC Amplitude in dBuV
KSC
Amplitude in dBuV
Syntax
KSC
;
Description
The KSC command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker,
display line and threshold) to dBuV units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSC command are identical to the AUNITS DBUV
command (page 119).
192
Chapter 4
KSc
A Plus B to A
Syntax
KSc
;
Description
The KSc command does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace
B, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains
unchanged, KSc can restore the original trace after an AMB or a C2
command has been executed.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSc are identical to the APB command
(page 116).
Chapter 4
193
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSc A Plus B to A
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSD Amplitude in Volts
KSD
Amplitude in Volts
Syntax
KSD
;
Description
The KSD command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker,
display line and threshold) to voltage units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSD command are identical to the AUNITS V
command (page 119).
194
Chapter 4
KSd
Negative Peak Detection
Syntax
KSd
;
Description
The KSd command selects negative-peak input detection for displaying
trace information. Each trace element is updated with the minimum
value detected during the sweep.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSd are identical to the DET NEG
command (page 156).
Chapter 4
195
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSd Negative Peak Detection
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSE Title Mode
KSE
Title Mode
Syntax
KSE
char
real
terminator
;
Description
The KSE command activates the title mode, writing a message to the
top line of the display.
NOTE
The only characters that Option 266 will accept as a terminator are the
‘@’ character and the carriage return.
196
Chapter 4
KSe
Sample Detection
Syntax
KSe
;
Description
The KSe command selects sample input detection for displaying trace
information.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSe are identical to the DET SMP
command (page 156).
Chapter 4
197
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSe Sample Detection
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSG Video Averaging On
KSG
Video Averaging On
Syntax
KSG
SP
average
length
;
ON
OA
?
Description
The KSG command enables video averaging. The averaged trace is
displayed in Trace A.
If video averaging is off when either KSG? or KSG OA is sent to the
instrument, video averaging is turned on and the current average count
is returned to the controller.
NOTE
The functions of the KSG command are identical to the VAVG ON
command (page 363).
198
Chapter 4
KSg
Display Off
Syntax
KSg
;
Description
The KSg command turns the analyzer’s display Off.
NOTE
On the legacy spectrum analyzers, this command turned the CRT beam
power off to avoid unnecessary wear on the CRT. Although this
command is supported, displays used on the PSA Series analyzers have
a much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum
analyzers.
Chapter 4
199
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSg Display Off
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSH Video Averaging Off
KSH
Video Averaging Off
Syntax
KSH
;
Description
The KSH command switches video averaging Off.
NOTE
The functions of the KSH command are identical to the VAVG OFF
command (page 363).
200
Chapter 4
KSh
Display On
Syntax
KSh
;
Description
The KSh command turns the analyzer’s display On.
NOTE
On the early models of spectrum analyzers, CRT beam power was often
switched Off to prevent wear of the CRT. This command (KSh) was used
to turn the CRT beam power on again. Although this command is
supported, displays used on the PSA Series analyzers have a much
longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum analyzers.
Chapter 4
201
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSh Display On
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSI Extend Analyzer Reference Level
KSI
Extend Analyzer Reference Level
Syntax
KSi
;
Description
The KSI command was used in the legacy analyzers to extend the
analyzer reference level range. As the PSA analyzer already has a
minimum reference level of −170 dBm and a maximum reference level
of +30 dBm, this command has no effect in Option 266 Programming
Code Compatibility Suite. Issuing this command will not generate an
error in Option 266 Programming Code Compatibility Suite.
202
Chapter 4
KSi
Exchange Trace B and Trace C
Syntax
KSj
;
Description
The KSi command exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
NOTE
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C
cannot be updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current
settings of the analyzer are reflected in the data exchanged between
Trace B and Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
• Select single sweep mode (S2 (page 321) or SNGLS command
(page 332))
• Select the desired analyzer settings
• Take one complete sweep using the TS command (page 362)
• Exchange the data
NOTE
The functions of the command KSi are identical to the BXC command
(page 133) and the XCH TRB,TRC command (page 371).
Chapter 4
203
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSi Exchange Trace B and Trace C
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSj View Trace C
KSj
View Trace C
Syntax
KSj
;
Description
The KSj command displays Trace C.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSj are identical to the VIEW TRC
command (page 369).
204
Chapter 4
KSK
Marker to Next Peak
Syntax
KSK
;
Description
If there is a marker on the screen, the KSK command moves this
marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.
NOTE
The functions of the KSK command are similar to the MKPK NH
command (page 270), except that KSK does not take into account the
marker peak threshold value or the marker peak excursion value. For
more details on marker peak threshold, see the MKPT command
(page 271) and the TH command (page 351). For more details on
marker peak excursion, see the MKPX command (page 272).
Chapter 4
205
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSK Marker to Next Peak
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSk Blank Trace C
KSk
Blank Trace C
Syntax
KSk
;
Description
The KSj command blanks Trace C.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSk are identical to the BLANK TRC
command (page 130))
206
Chapter 4
KSL
Marker Noise Off
Syntax
KSL
;
Description
The KSL command disables the noise density function which displays
the RMS noise density at the marker. KSL does not blank the marker.
NOTE
The functions of the KSL command are identical to the MKNOISE OFF
command (page 266).
Chapter 4
207
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSL Marker Noise Off
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSl Transfer Trace B to Trace C
KSl
Transfer Trace B to Trace C
Syntax
KSl
;
Description
The KSl command transfers Trace B data to Trace C
NOTE
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C
cannot be updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current
settings of the analyzer are reflected in the data transferred from Trace
B to Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
• Select single sweep mode (S2 (page 321) or SNGLS command
(page 332))
• Select the desired analyzer settings
• Take one complete sweep using the TS command (page 362)
• Transfer the data
NOTE
The functions of the command KSl are identical to the BTC command
(page 132).
208
Chapter 4
KSM
Marker Noise On
Syntax
KSM
;
?
OA
Description
The KSM command displays the noise density at the marker. The noise
density is normalized to a 1Hz bandwidth.
NOTE
The functions of the KSM command are identical to the MKNOISE ON
command (page 266).
NOTE
Some differences in marker noise may be seen between the legacy
analyzers and the PSA Series analyzers due to the greater dynamic
range of the PSA Series.
NOTE
All legacy analyzer languages: If either the M3 command or the MKD
command is executed with the marker noise function active
(MKNOISE ON or KSM), the marker amplitude displayed and
returned by the MKA? command (page 255) or the MA command
(page 245) is the difference between the noise densities at the reference
marker and at the delta marker position.
8566, 8568 and 8590 Series only: If either the M3 command or the MKD
command is executed before marker noise has been activated (using the
MKNOISE ON or KSM commands), the marker noise amplitude that is
displayed on the screen is the difference between the carrier wave
power and the noise density at the delta marker position. Regardless of
the order in which Marker Noise and Delta Marker are activated, the
marker amplitude displayed and returned by the MKA? command
(page 255) or the MA command (page 245) is the difference between
the noise densities at the reference marker and at the delta marker.
That is, the value returned by MKA? and MA does not always agree
with that displayed on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer. These
returned values will only be correct as long as there has been no change
in either the delta marker state or the marker noise state from the front
panel.
8560 Series only: If either the M3 command or the MKD command is
Chapter 4
209
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSM Marker Noise On
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSM Marker Noise On
executed before marker noise has been activated (using the
MKNOISE ON or KSM commands), the marker noise amplitude that is
displayed on the screen is the difference between the carrier wave
power and the noise density at the delta marker position. The value
returned by the MKA? or MA command is the difference between the
carrier wave power and the noise density at the delta marker position.
That is, the value returned by MKA? and MA will agree with that
displayed on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer.
NOTE
The nominal noise bandwidth to RBW ratio for PSA analyzers is 1.055
for all RBWs. The nominal ratio for the 8566 family of analyzers is
1.128 for RBWs 100 kHz and higher, and 1.114 for RBWs of 30kHz and
lower.
210
Chapter 4
KSm
Graticule Off
Syntax
KSm
;
Description
The KSm command blanks the graticule on the analyzer display.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSm are identical to the GRAT OFF
command (page 180).
Chapter 4
211
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSm Graticule Off
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSN Marker Minimum
KSN
Marker Minimum
Syntax
KSN
;
Description
The KSN command moves the marker to the minimum value detected.
NOTE
The functions of the KSN command are identical to the MKMIN
command (page 264).
212
Chapter 4
KSn
Graticule On
Syntax
KSn
;
Description
The KSn command turns on the graticule on the analyzer display.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSn are identical to the GRAT ON
command (page 180).
Chapter 4
213
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSn Graticule On
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSO Marker Span
KSO
Marker Span
Syntax
KSO
;
Description
The KSO command operates only when the delta marker is On (see
MKD (page 259) or M3 (page 242)). When the delta marker is on and
the KSO command is executed, the left marker specifies the start
frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If the delta
marker is off, the command does nothing.
NOTE
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its
position.
NOTE
The functions of the KSO command are identical to the MKSP
command (page 276).
214
Chapter 4
KSo
Annotation Off
Syntax
KSo
;
Description
The KSo command blanks the annotation on the analyzer display.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSo are identical to the ANNOT OFF
command (page 115).
Chapter 4
215
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSo Annotation Off
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSp Annotation On
KSp
Annotation On
Syntax
KSp
;
Description
The KSp command activates the annotation on the analyzer display.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSp are identical to the ANNOT ON
command (page 115).
216
Chapter 4
KST
Fast Preset
Syntax
KST
;
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the analyzer back to its factory
settings.
NOTE
There is no fast preset for the PSA series analyzers. Instead, the Code
Compatibility software performs an instrument preset (IP) when the
KST command is issued. The functions of the command KST are
therefore identical to the IP command (page 185).
Chapter 4
217
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KST Fast Preset
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSV Frequency Offset
KSV
Frequency Offset
Syntax
KSV
SP
real
HZ
;
KZ
MZ
GZ
OA
?
Description
The KSV command allows you to specify a value that offsets the
frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts, for example, center
frequency. Relative values, for example, span and delta marker, are not
offset.
NOTE
The functions of the KSV command are identical to the FOFFSET
command (page 175).
218
Chapter 4
KSx
External Trigger
Syntax
KSx
;
Description
The KSx command activates the normal external trigger mode. When
the KSx command is executed, the RF input signal is only displayed
when the external trigger level exceeds the trigger threshold level.
NOTE
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep
time is less than 20 msec, the display only gets refreshed when a fresh
trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.
Equally, if any of the 8560-E Series of analyzers, that is the 8560E,
8561E, 8563E, 8564E and the 8565E, are in zero span and with a sweep
time of less than 50 msec, and they do not have Option 007 - Fast
Digitized Time Domain installed, the display only gets refreshed when
a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to
flicker.
In Option 266, all traces are displayed continuously, so all traces are
therefore free of flicker.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSx are identical to the TM EXT
command (page 354).
Chapter 4
219
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSx External Trigger
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSy Video Trigger
KSy
Video Trigger
Syntax
KSy
;
Description
The KSy command activates the normal video trigger mode. When the
KSy command is executed, the RF input signal is only displayed when
the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the input
signal, exceeds the trigger threshold level.
NOTE
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep
time is less than 20 msec, the display only gets refreshed when a fresh
trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.
Equally, if any of the 8560-E Series of analyzers, that is the 8560E,
8561E, 8563E, 8564E and the 8565E, are in zero span and with a sweep
time of less than 50 msec, and they do not have Option 007 - Fast
Digitized Time Domain installed, the display only gets refreshed when
a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the displayed trace to
flicker.
In Option 266, all traces are displayed continuously, so all traces are
therefore free of flicker.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSy are identical to the TM VID
command (page 354) and to the T4 command (page 347).
220
Chapter 4
KSZ
Reference Level Offset
Syntax
KSZ
SP
real
DM
;
MV
UV
OA
?
Description
The KSZ command offsets all amplitude readouts on the display but
without affecting the trace.
Once activated, the KSZ command displays the amplitude offset on the
left side of the screen.
Entering KSZ 0 or presetting the spectrum analyzer eliminates an
amplitude offset.
NOTE
The functions of the KSZ command are identical to the ROFFSET
command (page 318).
Chapter 4
221
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
KSZ Reference Level Offset
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
L0 [zero] Display Line Off
L0 [zero]
Display Line Off
Syntax
L0
;
Description
The L0 [zero] command disables the display line.
NOTE
The functions of the L0 [zero] command are identical to the DLE OFF
command (page 160).
222
Chapter 4
LF
Low Frequency Preset
Syntax
LF
;
Description
Performs a low frequency preset. That is, it selects a Start Frequency of
0 Hz and a Stop Frequency of 2.5 GHz, a Reference Level of 0dBm, and
sets all coupled functions to automatic.
NOTE
If you are using an E4401B or E4411B analyzer, the Stop Frequency
will be clipped to the limits of the analyzer, that is 1.5 GHz.
Chapter 4
223
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LF Low Frequency Preset
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LG Logarithmic Scale
LG
Logarithmic Scale
Syntax
LG
SP
DB
number
;
DM
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Description
Specifies the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) as logarithmic
units, without changing the reference level. The integer ranges vary
between the different remote languages. The following table lists the
ranges for each remote language.
Table 4-13
224
Remote Language
Integer Range using
the LG Command
8560E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8561E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8562E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8563E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8564E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8565E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8566A
1, 2, 5, and 10
8566B
1, 2, 5, and 10
8568A
1, 2, 5, and 10
8568B
1, 2, 5, and 10
8590L
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
8591E
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
Chapter 4
Table 4-13
Chapter 4
Remote Language
Integer Range using
the LG Command
8592L
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
8593E
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
8594E
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
8594L
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
8595E
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
8596E
0.1 dB to 20.0 dB
225
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LG Logarithmic Scale
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMD Limit Line Delta Value
LIMD
Limit Line Delta Value
Syntax
LIMD
SP
number
DB
;
?
Description
The LIMD command is used to enter the delta value for the amplitude
of a limit line segment.
NOTE
The response to the query command LIMD? is the delta value for the
segment currently selected with the SEDI command (page 326).
226
Chapter 4
LIMF
Limit Line Frequency Value
Syntax
LIMF
SP
number
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Description
The LIMF command is used to enter a frequency value for a limit-line
segment.
NOTE
The response to the query command LIMF? is the delta value for the
segment currently selected with the SEDI command (page 326).
Chapter 4
227
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMF Limit Line Frequency Value
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMIDEL Delete Limit Line Table
LIMIDEL
Delete Limit Line Table
Syntax
LIMIDEL
;
Description
The LIMIDEL command deletes all upper and lower segments in the
current limit-line table.
228
Chapter 4
LIMIDISP
Limit Line Display
Syntax
LIMIDISP
ON
SP
;
OFF
AUTO
UPPER
LOWER
?
Description
Controls the display of the limit line (or limit lines).
Chapter 4
229
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMIDISP Limit Line Display
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMIFAIL Limits Failed
LIMIFAIL
Limits Failed
Syntax
LIMIFAIL
?
;
Description
The LIMIFAIL command returns a number between 0 and 3 which
specifies whether the active trace passed or failed the upper and lower
limit line tests. The meanings of the returned numbers are shown
below.
Table 4-14
Results of the LIMIFAIL Command
Result
Meaning
0
The active trace passed both the upper and the lower limit
tests.
1
The active trace failed the lower limit test.
2
The active trace failed the upper limit test.
3
The active trace failed both the upper and the lower limit
tests.
230
Chapter 4
LIMIFT
Select Frequency or Time Limit Line
Syntax
LIMIFT
TIME
SP
;
FREQ
?
Description
The LIMIFT command determines how the limit-line segments are
defined. They can be defined according to frequency, or according to the
sweep time setting of the spectrum analyzer.
Chapter 4
231
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMIFT Select Frequency or Time Limit Line
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMIPURGE Delete Current Limit Line
LIMIPURGE
Delete Current Limit Line
Syntax
LIMIPURGE
;
Description
The LIMIPURGE command deletes the current limit line.
232
Chapter 4
LIMIREL
Relative Limit Lines
Syntax
LIMIREL
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.
Chapter 4
233
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMIREL Relative Limit Lines
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMITEST Enable Limit Line Testing
LIMITEST
Enable Limit Line Testing
Syntax
LIMITEST
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
The LIMITEST command compares trace A with the current limit line
data.
234
Chapter 4
LIML
Lower-Limit Amplitude
Syntax
LIML
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
?
Description
The LIML command is used within the SEDI command (page 326) to
assign the lower-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
Chapter 4
235
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIML Lower-Limit Amplitude
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMM Limit Middle-Amplitude
LIMM
Limit Middle-Amplitude
Syntax
LIMM
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
?
Description
The LIMM command is used within the SEDI command (page 326) to
assign the middle amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
236
Chapter 4
LIMU
Upper-Limit Amplitude
Syntax
LIMU
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
?
Description
The LIMU command is used within the SEDI command (page 326) to
assign the upper-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
Chapter 4
237
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LIMU Upper-Limit Amplitude
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LN Linear Scale
LN
Linear Scale
Syntax
LN
;
Description
Scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to the
input voltage, without changing the reference level. The bottom line of
the graticule represents 0 volts.
238
Chapter 4
LSPAN
Previous Span
Syntax
LSPAN
;
Description
The LSPAN command changes the spectrum analyzer's span to the
previous span setting.
Chapter 4
239
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
LSPAN Previous Span
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
M1 [one] Marker Off
M1 [one]
Marker Off
Syntax
M1
;
Description
The M1 [one] command blanks any markers showing on the display.
NOTE
The functions of the M1 [one] command are identical to the MKOFF
ALL command (page 268).
240
Chapter 4
M2 [two]
Marker Normal
Syntax
M2
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Description
The M2 [two] command moves the active marker to the marker
frequency. If the active marker type is not currently normal (for
example, it is delta or peak), the M2 command will change it to a
normal marker.
NOTE
The functions of the M2 command are identical to the MKN command
(page 265).
NOTE
Model numbers 8566, 8588, and the 8590 Series only: If the active
marker has not been declared with MKACT, a normal marker is turned
on and this active marker is assumed to be marker number 1 [one].
Chapter 4
241
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
M2 [two] Marker Normal
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
M3 [three] Delta Marker
M3 [three]
Delta Marker
Syntax
M3
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Description
The M3 [three] command computes the frequency and amplitude
difference between the active marker and the delta (or difference)
marker.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the M3 command
places one at the specified frequency or on the right hand edge of the
display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the M3
command places an active marker at the center of the screen.
NOTE
The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise specified
by the MKACT command (page 256).
242
Chapter 4
NOTE
All legacy analyzer languages: If the M3 command is executed with the
marker noise function active (MKNOISE ON or KSM), the marker
amplitude displayed and returned by the MKA? command (page 255) or
the MA command (page 245) is the difference between the noise
densities at the reference marker and at the delta marker position.
8566, 8568 and 8590 Series only: If the M3 command is executed before
marker noise has been activated (using the MKNOISE ON or KSM
commands), the marker noise amplitude that is displayed on the screen
is the difference between the carrier wave power and the noise density
at the delta marker position. Regardless of the order in which Marker
Noise and Delta Marker are activated, the marker amplitude displayed
and returned by the MKA? command (page 255) or the MA command
(page 245) is the difference between the noise densities at the reference
marker and at the delta marker. That is, the value returned by MKA?
and MA does not always agree with that displayed on the screen of the
PSA Series analyzer. These returned values will only be correct as long
as there has been no change in either the delta marker state or the
marker noise state from the front panel.
8560 Series only: If the M3 command is executed before marker noise
has been activated (using the MKNOISE ON or KSM commands), the
marker noise amplitude that is displayed on the screen is the difference
between the carrier wave power and the noise density at the delta
marker position. The value returned by the MKA? or MA command is
the difference between the carrier wave power and the noise density at
the delta marker position. That is, the value returned by MKA? and MA
will agree with that displayed on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer.
NOTE
The nominal ratio for PSA analyzers is 1.055 for all RBWs. The nominal
ratio for the 8566 family of analyzers is 1.128 for RBWs 100 kHz and
higher, and 1.114 for RBWs of 30kHz and lower.
NOTE
The functions of the M3 command are identical to the MKD command
(page 259).
Chapter 4
243
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
M3 [three] Delta Marker
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
M4 [four] Marker Zoom
M4 [four]
Marker Zoom
Syntax
M4
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Description
The M4 [four] command, when specifying either the UP or DN
parameter, increases or decreases the frequency span by one step.
When specifying a numeric value, the M4 command moves the markers
horizontal (X) position to the specified position in frequency or time.
NOTE
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does
not set the active function to the active marker.
244
Chapter 4
MA
Marker Amplitude Output
Syntax
MA
;
Description
The MA command returns the amplitude level of the active marker if
the marker is on the screen. If both the active marker and the delta
marker are displayed, the MA command returns the amplitude
difference between the two markers.
NOTE
The format of the returned data when using the MKA command is
dependent on the currently set trace data format (refer to TDF, MDS,
O1, O2, O3, or O4) when the selected remote language is either 8566 or
8590. When the selected remote language is 8560, the marker
amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
NOTE
The functions of the MA command are identical to the MKA command
(page 255).
Chapter 4
245
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MA Marker Amplitude Output
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MC0 [zero] Marker Frequency Counter Off
MC0 [zero]
Marker Frequency Counter Off
Syntax
MC0
;
Description
The MC0 [zero] command turns the marker frequency counter off.
NOTE
The functions of the MC0 [zero] command are identical to the MKFC
OFF command (page 262).
246
Chapter 4
MC1 [one]
Marker Frequency Counter On
Syntax
MC1
;
Description
The MC1 [one] command turns the marker frequency counter on.
NOTE
The functions of the MC1 [one] command are identical to the MKFC ON
command (page 262).
Chapter 4
247
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MC1 [one] Marker Frequency Counter On
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MDS Measurement Data Size
MDS
Measurement Data Size
Syntax
MDS
B
SP
;
W
?
Description
The MDS command formats binary data in one of the following formats:
B
selects a data size of one 8-bit byte.
W
selects a data size of one word, which is two 8-bit bytes.
If no keyword is specified in the command, the default value of W is
assumed.
248
Chapter 4
MEAN
Trace Mean
Syntax
MEAN
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Description
Returns the mean value of the specified trace in display units.
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Chapter 4
249
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MEAN Trace Mean
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MEANPWR Mean Power measurement
MEANPWR
Mean Power measurement
Syntax
MEANPWR
SP
TRA
,
number
,
?
;
TRB
Description
The MEANPWR command measures the average power of the carrier
during that portion of the time when it is on. The on state is defined as
the time when the signal is within a selected number of dB of its peak
level. The range of amplitudes that is defined as the on state can be set
with the command. The amplitude range is set relative to the peak
value of the signal.
NOTE
The MEANPWR command is similar to the CARRON command
(page 138), except that the CARRON command defines ‘on’ as that time
when the signal is within 20dB of its peak level.
250
Chapter 4
MEASOFF
Measurement Off
Syntax
MEASOFF
;
Description
Turns the current measurement off if the current measurement is ACP
(page 93) or CHP (page 142).
NOTE
If ACPPAR (page 105) is set to automatic, the MEASOFF command
returns the following settings back to their pre-measurement states:
• Frequency span
• Resolution bandwidth
• Video bandwidth
• Center frequency step size
• Sweep time
• Detector mode
• Amplitude scale
It does not do any of the following:
• Change the values of ACPSP or ACPBW
• Restore trace elements
• Restore trigger mode
• Restore Amplitude units
• Restore any trace math functions
Chapter 4
251
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MEASOFF Measurement Off
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MF Marker Frequency Output
MF
Marker Frequency Output
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
MF
;
8560 Series and 8590 Series Remote Language
MF
?
;
Description
Returns the frequency (or time) of the on-screen active marker. If both
an active marker and the delta marker are on the screen, the frequency
difference is returned.
NOTE
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count
set to On when using the MF? command, the marker frequency count
value is returned to the controller.
252
Chapter 4
MINH
Minimum Hold
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
MINH
SP
TRA
;
TRB
8590 Series Remote Language
MINH
SP
TRC
;
Description
The MINH command updates the chosen trace with the minimum
signal level detected at each trace-data point from subsequent sweeps.
Chapter 4
253
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MINH Minimum Hold
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MINPOS Minimum X Position
MINPOS
Minimum X Position
Syntax
MINPOS
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Description
The MINPOS command returns the X co-ordinate value that
corresponds to the minimum amplitude of the specified trace.
254
Chapter 4
MKA
Marker Amplitude
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
MKA
SP
number
DM
;
?
8560 Series and 8590 Series Remote Language
MKA
?
;
Description
8566 and 8568: Specifies the amplitude of the active marker in dBm
when the active marker is the fixed or amplitude type (refer to the
MKTYPE command).
8560 and 8590: Returns the amplitude of the active marker. For
further details, refer to the MA command.
NOTE
The format of the returned data when using the MKA command is
dependent on the currently set trace data format (refer to TDF, MDS,
O1, O2, O3, or O4) when the selected remote language is either 8566 or
8590. When the selected remote language is 8560, the marker
amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
NOTE
The functions of the MKA command are identical to the MA command
(page 245).
NOTE
In the 8566, 8568, and in the 8590 Series analyzers, the MKA command
can be used with a numeric argument that places the marker at the
specified amplitude on the screen. For the 8566 and 8568, the MKA
command will only accept a value in PSA Series analyzers with
firmware Rev. A.08.08 or later. In Option 266 Programming Code
Compatibility, MKA is a query only command. That is, the command
will not accept arguments of any type, and can only be used in the
form MKA?.
Chapter 4
255
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKA Marker Amplitude
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKACT Activate Marker
MKACT
Activate Marker
Syntax
MKACT
marker
number
SP
;
?
Table 4-15
Item
Marker
Number
Description/Default
Any valid integer. Default value is 1.
Range
1 to 4
Description
MKACT specifies the active marker. There can be four different
markers, but only one marker can be active at any time.
256
Chapter 4
MKBW
Marker Bandwidth
Syntax
MKBW
SP
number
?
;
Description
Returns the bandwidth at the specified power level relative to an
on-screen marker (if present) or the signal peak (if no on-screen marker
is present).
Chapter 4
257
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKBW Marker Bandwidth
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKCF Marker to Center Frequency
MKCF
Marker to Center Frequency
Syntax
MKCF
;
Description
Sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency and moves the
marker to the center of the screen.
NOTE
The functions of the MKCF command are identical to the E2 command
(page 164).
258
Chapter 4
MKD
Marker Delta
Syntax
MKD
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Step Increment: by 1/10 of the frequency span
Description
The MKD command computes the frequency and amplitude difference
of the active marker and the delta marker. These values are displayed
in the screen.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the MKD command
places one at the specified frequency or on the right hand edge of the
display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the MKD
command places an active marker at the center of the screen.
NOTE
The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise specified
by the MKACT command (page 256).
Chapter 4
259
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKD Marker Delta
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKD Marker Delta
NOTE
All legacy analyzer languages: If the MKD command is executed with
the marker noise function active (MKNOISE ON or KSM), the marker
amplitude displayed and returned by the MKA? command (page 255) or
the MA command (page 245) is the difference between the noise
densities at the reference marker and at the delta marker position.
8566, 8568 and 8590 Series only: If the MKD command is executed
before marker noise has been activated (using the MKNOISE ON or
KSM commands), the marker noise amplitude that is displayed on the
screen is the difference between the carrier wave power and the noise
density at the delta marker position. Regardless of the order in which
Marker Noise and Delta Marker are activated, the marker amplitude
displayed and returned by the MKA? command (page 255) or the MA
command (page 245) is the difference between the noise densities at
the reference marker and at the delta marker. That is, the value
returned by MKA? and MA does not always agree with that displayed
on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer. These returned values will
only be correct as long as there has been no change in either the delta
marker state or the marker noise state from the front panel.
8560 Series only: If the MKD command is executed before marker noise
has been activated (using the MKNOISE ON or KSM commands), the
marker noise amplitude that is displayed on the screen is the difference
between the carrier wave power and the noise density at the delta
marker position. The value returned by the MKA? or MA command is
the difference between the carrier wave power and the noise density at
the delta marker position. That is, the value returned by MKA? and MA
will agree with that displayed on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer.
NOTE
The nominal ratio for PSA analyzers is 1.055 for all RBWs. The nominal
ratio for the 8566 family of analyzers is 1.128 for RBWs 100 kHz and
higher, and 1.114 for RBWs of 30kHz and lower.
NOTE
The functions of the MKD command are identical to the M3 command
(page 242).
260
Chapter 4
MKF
Marker Frequency
Syntax
MKF
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Description
Specifies the frequency value of the active marker.
NOTE
With the 8560 Series languages, the data is always returned in ASCII
format.
WIth all other languages, the format of the returned data is determined
by the TDF (Trace Data Format) (page 350) command and, if TDF B
(binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command
(page 248).
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count
set to On when using the MKF? command, the marker frequency count
value is returned to the controller.
Chapter 4
261
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKF Marker Frequency
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKFC Marker Counter
MKFC
Marker Counter
Syntax
MKFC
SP
ON
;
OFF
SP
1
0
Description
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. The resolution of the
frequency marker counter is determined by the MKFCR command
(page 263).
NOTE
The functions of the MKFC command are identical to the MC0 [zero]
command (page 246) and MC1 [one] command (page 247).
262
Chapter 4
MKFCR
Marker Counter Resolution
Syntax
MKFCR
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
UP
SP
GZ
DN
OA
?
NOTE
The marker counter can be specified in time units when operating in
the time domain
Description
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. The marker
counter value is always given either in Hertz or in seconds depending
on whether the analyzer is operating in the frequency domain or the
time domain.
NOTE
On PSA analyzers, setting the marker frequency resolution will cause
the Gate Time to change. The Gate Time is calculated using the
following formula:
1
Gate Time = ----------------------------------------Resolution Value
For restrictions on the Gate Time, refer to the PSA User’s and
Programmer’s Reference, Volume 1.
NOTE
The functions of the MKFCR command are identical to the KS=
command (page 187).
Chapter 4
263
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKFCR Marker Counter Resolution
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKMIN Marker Minimum
MKMIN
Marker Minimum
Syntax
MKMIN
;
Description
Moves the active marker to the minimum value detected.
NOTE
The functions of the MKMIN command are identical to the KSN
command (page 212).
264
Chapter 4
MKN
Marker Normal
Syntax
MKN
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Step Increment: by 1/10 of the frequency span.
Description
The MKN command moves the active marker to the specified frequency.
If the active marker has not been declared with MKACT, a normal
marker is turned on and this active marker is assumed to be 1. If the
active marker type is not currently normal (for example, it is delta or
peak), the MKN command will change it to a normal marker.
NOTE
The functions of the MKN command are identical to the M2 [two]
command (page 241).
Chapter 4
265
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKN Marker Normal
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKNOISE Marker Noise
MKNOISE
Marker Noise
Syntax
MKNOISE
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
Displays the average RMS noise density at the marker.
NOTE
The functions of the MKNOISE command are identical to the KSM
command (page 209) and the KSL command (page 207).
NOTE
Some differences in marker noise may be seen between the legacy
analyzers and the PSA Series analyzers due to the greater dynamic
range of the PSA Series.
NOTE
All legacy analyzer languages: If either the M3 command or the MKD
command is executed with the marker noise function active
(MKNOISE ON or KSM), the marker amplitude displayed and
returned by the MKA? command (page 255) or the MA command
(page 245) is the difference between the noise densities at the reference
marker and at the delta marker position.
8566, 8568 and 8590 Series only: If either the M3 command or the MKD
command is executed before marker noise has been activated (using the
MKNOISE ON or KSM commands), the marker noise amplitude that is
displayed on the screen is the difference between the carrier wave
power and the noise density at the delta marker position. Regardless of
the order in which Marker Noise and Delta Marker are activated, the
marker amplitude displayed and returned by the MKA? command
(page 255) or the MA command (page 245) is the difference between
the noise densities at the reference marker and at the delta marker.
That is, the value returned by MKA? and MA does not always agree
with those displayed on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer. These
returned values will only be correct as long as there has been no change
266
Chapter 4
in either the delta marker state or the marker noise state from the front
panel.
8560 Series only: If either the M3 command or the MKD command is
executed before marker noise has been activated (using the
MKNOISE ON or KSM commands), the marker noise amplitude that is
displayed on the screen is the difference between the carrier wave
power and the noise density at the delta marker position. The value
returned by the MKA? or MA command is the difference between the
carrier wave power and the noise density at the delta marker position.
That is, the value returned by MKA? and MA will agree with that
displayed on the screen of the PSA Series analyzer.
NOTE
The nominal ratio for PSA analyzers is 1.055 for all RBWs. The nominal
ratio for the 8566 family of analyzers is 1.128 for RBWs 100 kHz and
higher, and 1.114 for RBWs of 30kHz and lower.
Chapter 4
267
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKNOISE Marker Noise
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKOFF Marker Off
MKOFF
Marker Off
Syntax
MKOFF
SP
ALL
;
Description
Turns off either the active marker or all the markers. If the ALL
parameter is omitted, only the active marker is turned off.
268
Chapter 4
MKP
Marker Position
Syntax
MKP
SP
integer
;
?
Description
Places the active marker at the specified X co-ordinate.
Chapter 4
269
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKP Marker Position
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKPK Marker Peak
MKPK
Marker Peak
Syntax
MKPK
SP
HI
;
NH
NR
NL
Description
Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK (no secondary keyword),
positions the active marker at the highest signal detected. If an active
marker is on the screen, the MKPK parameters move the marker as
follows:
HI (highest)
moves the active marker to the highest peak.
NH (next highest) moves the active marker to the next signal peak of
lower amplitude.
NR (next right) moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the
right of the current marker.
NL (next left)
moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the
left of the current marker.
NOTE
The functions of the MKPK command (no secondary keyword) and the
MKPK HI command are identical to the E1 commands: (page 163).
NOTE
The functions of the MKPK NH command are similar to the KSK
command (page 205), except that KSK does not take in to account the
marker peak excursion or marker peak threshold values. For more
details on marker peak excursion, see the MKPX command (page 272).
270
Chapter 4
MKPT
Marker Threshold
Syntax
MKPT
SP
number
SP
UP
DBM
;
DN
OA
?
Description
The MKPT command sets the minimum amplitude level from which a
peak on the trace can be detected.
NOTE
The default values and the range settings on Option 266 Programming
Code Compatibility are different than on the legacy analyzers. The
following table shows the differences.
Table 4-16
Range Settings and Default Values with the MKPT Command
Remote
Language
Default
Setting on
Original
Analyzer
Default
Setting on
PSA
analyzers
Valid
Range on
Legacy
Analyzer
Valid Range on
PSA analyzers
8560E/EC
Series
analyzers
–130 dBm
–100 dBm
–200 dBm
Ref Level to
(Ref Level (10 × Scale per
Division))
Chapter 4
to 30 dBm
271
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKPT Marker Threshold
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKPX Marker Peak Excursion
MKPX
Marker Peak Excursion
Syntax
MKPX
SP
SP
real
DB
;
UP
DN
OA
?
Preset State: 6 dB.
Step Increment: by 1 dB.
Description
Specifies the minimum signal excursion for the spectrum analyzer’s
internal peak identification routine.
The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of
less than 6 dB on either side of the marker would not be identified.
Thus, if an MKPK NH command were to be executed on such a signal,
the analyzer would not place a marker on this signal peak.
272
Chapter 4
MKREAD
Marker Readout
Syntax
MKREAD
FRQ
SP
;
SWT
IST
PER
?
Description
Selects the type of active trace information displayed by the spectrum
analyzer marker readout.
The MKREAD command can select the following types of active trace
information:
NOTE
FRQ
frequency
SWT
sweep time
IST
inverse sweep time
PER
period
The Inverse Sweep Time (IST) readout is only available when using a
delta marker in zero span.
The results of the data depend on the MKREAD parameter and the
frequency span, and whether the marker delta function is used.
Table 4-17
MKREAD
Type
Non-Zero Span
Non-Zero Span
Delta
Zero Span
Zero Span Delta
FRQ
Reads frequency
Reads delta
frequency
N/A
N/A
SWT
Reads time since
the start of sweep
Reads delta time
between end
points
Waveform
measurements
of detected
modulation
Waveform
measurements of
detected
modulation
Chapter 4
273
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKREAD Marker Readout
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKREAD Marker Readout
Table 4-17
MKREAD
Type
Non-Zero Span
Non-Zero Span
Delta
Zero Span
Zero Span Delta
IST
N/A
N/A
N/A
Computes
frequency
corresponding to
delta of markers.
Performs
1/ (T1 − T2)
PER
Period of
frequency
(Pulse
measurement)
delta time
N/A
N/A
NOTE
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is not available in the Programming
Code Compatibility Suite option.
274
Chapter 4
MKRL
Marker to Reference Level
Syntax
MKRL
;
Description
The MKRL command moves the active marker to the reference level.
NOTE
The functions of the MKRL command are identical to the E4 command
(page 166).
Chapter 4
275
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKRL Marker to Reference Level
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKSP Marker to Span
MKSP
Marker to Span
Syntax
MKSP
;
Description
The MKSP command operates only when the delta marker is On (see
MKD (page 259) or M3 (page 242)). When the delta marker is On and
MKSP is executed, the delta marker and active marker determine the
start and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies the start
frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If marker
delta is Off, there is no operation.
NOTE
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its
position.
NOTE
The functions of the MKSP command are identical to the KSO
command (page 214).
276
Chapter 4
MKSS
Marker to Step Size
Syntax
MKSS
;
Description
Sets the center-frequency step-size equal to the marker frequency. If the
analyzer is in the delta mode, the step size is set to the frequency
difference between the active and the delta marker.
NOTE
When the marker is a delta marker, the functions of the MKSS
command are identical to the E3 command (page 165).
Chapter 4
277
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKSS Marker to Step Size
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKT Marker Time
MKT
Marker Time
Syntax
MKT
SP
real
S
;
MS
US
SC
OA
?
Description
Places a marker at a position that corresponds to a specified point in
time during the sweep.
NOTE
The default unit of time is seconds (‘S’ or ‘SC’).
278
Chapter 4
MKTBL
Marker Table
Syntax
MKTBL
1
SP
;
0
?
Description
The MKTBL command turns the display of the marker table on or off.
Chapter 4
279
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKTBL Marker Table
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKTRACE Marker Trace
MKTRACE
Marker Trace
Syntax
MKTRACE
TRA
SP
;
TRB
TRC
?
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Description
Moves the active marker to the corresponding position in Trace 1, Trace
2, or Trace 3.
NOTE
If the marker is moved to an inactive trace, the marker will move to the
top of the screen on a PSA analyzer.
280
Chapter 4
MKTRACK
Marker Track
Syntax
MKTRACK
ON
SP
;
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of
the spectrum analyzer display and keeps the signal peak at center
screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on
the desired signal before turning on MKTRACK.
NOTE
The functions of the MKTRACK command are identical to the
MT0 [zero] command (page 285) and the MT1 [one] command
(page 286).
Chapter 4
281
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKTRACK Marker Track
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MKTYPE Marker Type
MKTYPE
Marker Type
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language only
MKTYPE
SP
PSN
;
AMP
FIXED
?
Description
Specifies the type of marker.
MKTYPE PSN allows the marker to be positioned horizontally in
display units (default). Use the MKP and MKF commands to position
the marker.
MKTYPE AMP allows the marker to be positioned according to
amplitude. Use the MKA command to position the marker.
MKTYPE FIXED allows a marker to be placed at any fixed point on the
display. Use the MKP, MKF, and MKA commands to position the
marker.
NOTE
Marker type can only be set for an active marker. The marker type is
reset to PSN when the marker is turned off (using the MKOFF
command) or the instrument is preset.
282
Chapter 4
ML
Mixer Level
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
ML
SP
real
DBM
;
UP
SP
DN
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
ML
SP
real
DB
;
DM
SP
UP
MV
DN
UV
OA
?
8590 Series Remote Language
ML
SP
real
DB
;
DM
SP
UP
DN
OA
?
Description
The ML command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to
the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input
attenuator setting.
Chapter 4
283
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ML Mixer Level
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ML Mixer Level
NOTE
If an external amplifier gain value is set, the mixer level is determined
using the following equation:
Mixer Level = Ref. Level - Attenuation + Ext. Amplifier Gain
The external amplifier gain is not preset by doing an IP command in
case the analyzer is measuring a large signal. This is to protect the
analyzer from damage from a large signal. For a helpful suggestion, see
Chapter 3 , “Hints and Tips,” on page 81.
NOTE
The functions of the ML command are identical to the KS, command
(page 186).
284
Chapter 4
MT0 [zero]
Marker Track Off
Syntax
MT0
;
Description
The MT0 [zero] command disables the marker tracking mode.
NOTE
The functions of the MT0 [zero] command are identical to the
MKTRACK OFF command (page 281).
Chapter 4
285
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MT0 [zero] Marker Track Off
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MT1 [one] Marker Track On
MT1 [one]
Marker Track On
Syntax
MT1
;
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of
the spectrum analyzer display and keeps the signal peak at center
screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on
the desired signal before issuing an MT1 [one] command.
NOTE
The functions of the MT1 command are identical to the MKTRACK ON
command (page 281).
286
Chapter 4
MXMH
Maximum Hold
Syntax
MXMH
SP
TRA
;
TRB
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected.
MXMH updates the specified trace (either Trace A or Trace B) with a
new value from a detector only if the new value is larger than the
previous trace data value.
NOTE
The functions of the MXMH command are identical to the A2 command
(page 90)and B2 command (page 126).
Chapter 4
287
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
MXMH Maximum Hold
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
O1 [one] Format - Display Units
O1 [one]
Format - Display Units
Syntax
O1
;
Description
The O1 [one] command transmits trace amplitude and position
information as decimal values in display units.
288
Chapter 4
O2 [two]
Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes
Syntax
O2
;
Description
The O2 [two] command transmits trace amplitude and position
information as two 8-bit binary numbers, or one instruction word.
Chapter 4
289
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
O2 [two] Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
O3 [three] Format - Real Amplitude Units
O3 [three]
Format - Real Amplitude Units
Syntax
O3
;
Description
The O3 [three] command transmits trace vertical axis information only,
in measurement units of Hz, dBm, dB, volts or seconds.
290
Chapter 4
O4 [four]
Format - One 8-Bit Byte
Syntax
O4
;
Description
The O4 [four] command transmits trace amplitude information only as
a binary number.
Chapter 4
291
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
O4 [four] Format - One 8-Bit Byte
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
OCCUP Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth
OCCUP
Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth
Syntax
OCCUP
SP
number
;
?
Description
The OCCUP command is used to query the current value of the percent
occupied power. This value is set by the DELMKBW (page 155) and the
PWRBW command (page 301) command. The OCCUP command can
also be used to set the percent occupied power.
292
Chapter 4
OL
Output Learn String
Syntax
OL
80 byte binary
string
SP
;
?
Description
The OL command transmits information to the controller that describes
the state of the analyzer when the OL command is executed. This
information is called the “learn string.” The learn string can be sent
from the controller memory back to the analyzer to restore the analyzer
to its original state.
NOTE
The OL command is not completely supported, due to differences
between the PSA series, ESA series, and 8566/8568.This command is
only supported on the PSA series of analyzers with firmware Rev.
A.08.02 or later.
Chapter 4
293
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
OL Output Learn String
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
OT Output Trace Annotations
OT
Output Trace Annotations
Syntax
OT
;
Description
The OT command sends 32 character-strings to the controller. Each
character-string can be up to 64 characters long.
NOTE
The 'data invalid indicator' status report given in string 27 of the
returned text is only supported on PSA.
294
Chapter 4
PEAKS
Peaks
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
PEAKS
SP
TRA
,
TRA
,
AMP
TRB
SP
TRB
SP
FRQ
?
;
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
PEAKS
TRA
SP
TRA
,
TRB
TRB
TRC
TRC
AMP
,
;
FRQ
8590 Series Remote Language
PEAKS
SP
TRA
,
TRA
,
AMP
TRB
SP
TRB
SP
FRQ
TRC
?
;
TRC
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data
Description
The PEAKS command sorts the signal peaks in the source trace by
frequency or amplitude, and sends the sorted results to the destination
trace.
Chapter 4
295
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PEAKS Peaks
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PKPOS Peak Position
PKPOS
Peak Position
Syntax
PKPOS
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Description
The PKPOS command returns the X co-ordinate value of the maximum
peak in the specified trace.
296
Chapter 4
PLOT
Plot
Syntax
PLOT
SP
value
,
value
,
value
,
value
;
Description
The PLOT command allows you transfer trace data, graticule and
annotation information to a printer using a parallel port.
NOTE
The legacy analyzers transferred data directly to a plotter via the GPIB
connection. The PLOT command now transfers data to a printer, and
prints the entire screen. For instructions on connecting your analyzer to
a printer, see the PSA User’s and Programmer’s Reference, Volume 1.
Although the PLOT command will read in plotter dimension values,
these will be ignored.
Chapter 4
297
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PLOT Plot
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PP Preselector Peak
PP
Preselector Peak
Syntax
PP
;
Description
The PP command optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude
of a signal at the active marker. If a marker is not on the screen, PP
places a marker at the highest signal level, and optimizes preselector
tracking at that frequency.
NOTE
This command is only supported when the analyzer’s maximum
frequency limit is greater than 3 GHz. If the command is issued on an
analyzer with a maximum frequency limit of 3 GHz or less, an error
message will be generated stating that the command is not supported.
298
Chapter 4
PREAMPG
External Preamplifier Gain
Syntax
PREAMPG
SP
number
DB
;
?
Description
Subtracts a positive or negative preamplifier gain value from the
displayed signal. The preamplifier gain is removed by entering a value
of 0.
NOTE
An Instrument Preset (using the IP command (page 185)) does not reset
the preamplifier gain to 0.
Chapter 4
299
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PREAMPG External Preamplifier Gain
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PRINT Print
PRINT
Print
Syntax
PRINT
;
Description
Transfers trace data, graticule and annotation of the analyzer screen
directly to a printer via a parallel port.
300
Chapter 4
PWRBW
Power Bandwidth
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
PWRBW
SP
TRA
number
;
TRB
TRC
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
PWRBW
SP
TRA
,
number
?
;
,
number
?
;
TRB
8590 Series Remote Language
PWRBW
SP
TRA
TRB
TRC
Description
Computes the combined power of all signal responses in the specified
trace, and returns the bandwidth of the specified percentage of total
power. The number in the command is a percentage value, that is, it
has a range of 0 to 100.
NOTE
If the percent total power is 100%, the power bandwidth equals the
frequency span.
NOTE
On the 8566A/B analyzer, this command stops the trace. That is not the
case with this Option 266 Programming Code Compatibility.
Chapter 4
301
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PWRBW Power Bandwidth
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
PWRUPTIME Power Up Time
PWRUPTIME
Power Up Time
Syntax
PWRUPTIME
;
Description
Returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the
spectrum analyzer was turned on.
302
Chapter 4
Q0 [zero]
EMI Peak Detection
Syntax
PWRUPTIME
;
Description
Sets the detector function to EMI detection. This is the same as Peak
detection but uses CISPR related bandwidths.
NOTE
DET? will return EPK after execution of the Q0 command.
Chapter 4
303
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
Q0 [zero] EMI Peak Detection
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
Q1 [one] Quasi-Peak Detection
Q1 [one]
Quasi-Peak Detection
Syntax
Q1
;
Description
Sets the detector function to Quasi-Peak detection. This is a fast-rise,
slow-fall detector used to make CISPR compliant EMI measurements.
NOTE
DET? will return QPD after execution of the Q1 command.
304
Chapter 4
R1 [one]
Illegal Command SRQ
Syntax
R1
;
Description
The R1 [one] command deactivates all analyzer service requests (SRQs)
except SRQ140, the illegal-command service request.
Chapter 4
305
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
R1 [one] Illegal Command SRQ
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
R2 [two] End-of-Sweep SRQ
R2 [two]
End-of-Sweep SRQ
Syntax
R2
;
Description
The R2 [two] command activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command
service requests.
306
Chapter 4
R3 [three]
Hardware Broken SRQ
Syntax
R3
;
Description
The R3 [three] command activates the hardware-broken and
illegal-command service requests.
Chapter 4
307
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
R3 [three] Hardware Broken SRQ
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
R4 [four] Units-Key-Pressed SRQ
R4 [four]
Units-Key-Pressed SRQ
Syntax
R4
;
Description
The R4 [four] command activate the units-key-pressed and
illegal-command SRQs.
NOTE
PSA analyzers cannot replicate the units-key-pressed service request
since no front panel interaction is supported.
308
Chapter 4
RB
Resolution Bandwidth
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
RB
SP
HZ
real
;
KHZ
SP
UP
MHZ
DN
GHZ
AUTO
KZ
MAN
MZ
OA
GZ
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
RB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Preset State for all languages: 3 MHz, auto coupled.
Step Increment for all languages: In a 1, 3, 10 series.
Chapter 4
309
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RB Resolution Bandwidth
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RB Resolution Bandwidth
8590 Series Remote Language
RB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
OA
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Preset State for all languages: 3 MHz, auto coupled.
Step Increment for all languages: In a 1, 3, 10 series.
Description
The RB command specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available
bandwidths are 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz,
300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The resolution bandwidths, video
bandwidths, and sweep time are normally coupled. Executing RB
decouples them. Execute CR (page 150) to reestablish coupling.
NOTE
Default values on PSA analyzers may vary from the legacy analyzers.
Refer to the PSA User’s and Programmer’s Reference, Volume 1 to find
out any restrictions that may apply.
310
Chapter 4
RBR
Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
Syntax
RBR
SP
SP
real
;
UP
DN
OA
?
Description
This command is only supported in PSA Series analyzers. It sets the
span to resolution bandwidth ratio. Allows you to set the Span/RBW
ratio to 1/<value>, where <value> is sent by the user.
Chapter 4
311
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RBR Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RC Recall State
RC
Recall State
Syntax
RC
SP
digit
;
Description
Recalls analyzer state data from the specified state register in the
analyzer’s memory.
Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain
instrument states (such as front panel configuration) saved with the
SAVES command (page 323) or the SV command (page 343).
NOTE
Recalling the Preset state (RC 7) is only supported in Option 266
Programming Code Compatibility Suite if Save Reg 7 (Preset only) is
switched On in the Preferences menu (see page 1-39). Only the Preset
state can be recalled. The previous state can not be recalled. With the
Save Reg 7 (Preset only) turned Off, the measurement performance of the
analyzer will be faster than when it is turned On.
NOTE
The functions of the RC command are identical to the RCLS command
(page 313).
312
Chapter 4
RCLS
Recall State
Syntax
RCLS
SP
digit
;
Description
Recalls analyzer state data from the specified state register in the
analyzer’s memory.
Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain
instrument states (such as front panel configuration) saved with the
SAVES command (page 323) or the SV command (page 343).
NOTE
The functions of the RCLS command are identical to the RC command
(page 312).
NOTE
Recalling the Preset state (RCLS 7) is only supported in Option 266
Programming Code Compatibility Suite if Save Reg 7 (Preset only) is
switched On in the Preferences menu (see page 1-39). Only the Preset
state can be recalled. The previous state can not be recalled.
Chapter 4
313
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RCLS Recall State
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
REV Revision
REV
Revision
Syntax
REV
;
Description
The REV command returns the firmware revision number.
NOTE
In PSA analyzers, this command returns the build date of Option 266
that you have installed in your analyzer. The date is returned in YYWW
format where YY is the number of years since 1950, and WW is week
number within that year (often referred to as “Work Week”).
As an example, if your Option 266 Programming Code Compatibility
firmware was built on May 23 2004, the number 5421 would be
returned. The year 2004 is 54 years after 1950, and May 23 is the 21st
week of the year, hence 5421.
314
Chapter 4
RL
Reference Level
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
RL
SP
real
DBM
;
DBMV
DBUV
MV
UV
V
SP
UP
MW
DN
UW
OA
W
DM
?
8566, 8568, and 8590 Series Remote Language
RL
SP
real
DB
;
DM
SP
UP
MV
DN
UV
OA
?
Description
Specifies the amplitude level of the top graticule line on the display.
This represents the reference level.
CAUTION
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the spectrum analyzer. For a
helpful suggestion on this subject, see Chapter 3 , “Hints and Tips,” on
page 81.
Chapter 4
315
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RL Reference Level
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RL Reference Level
NOTE
The 8590 Series of analyzers have a maximum value of 60 dBm for the
reference level. The range of reference levels for the PSA Series of
analyzers depends on the other settings shown below:
• –170 dBm to +30 dBm with 0 dB reference level offset.
• –160 dBm to +40 dBm with 10 dB reference level offset.
• –180 dBm to +20 dBm with 10 dB external amplifier gain.
• –170 dBm to 0 dBm with preamp on (Option 1DS).
NOTE
If the display line is on, changing the reference level does not adjust the
position of the display line.
316
Chapter 4
RMS
Root Mean Square Value
Returns the root mean square value of the trace in measurement units.
Syntax
RMS
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data.
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Description
Returns the RMS value of the trace in display units.
Chapter 4
317
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RMS Root Mean Square Value
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ROFFSET Reference Level Offset
ROFFSET
Reference Level Offset
Syntax
8560 Series and 8590 Series Remote Language
ROFFSET
SP
real
DB
;
DM
;
UP
SP
DN
?
8566 Remote Language
ROFFSET
SP
real
MV
UV
DB
OA
?
Description
Offsets all amplitude readouts without affecting the trace.
Once activated, the ROFFSET command displays the amplitude offset
on the left side of the screen.
Entering ROFFSET 0 or presetting the spectrum analyzer eliminates
an amplitude offset.
NOTE
The functions of the ROFFSET command are identical to the KSZ
command (page 221).
318
Chapter 4
RQS
Service Request Mask
Syntax
RQS
SP
number
;
?
Description
Sets a bit mask for service requests.
NOTE
Some differences may be noticed in the value returned by the RQS
query when compared with the value set. This is because Option 266 on
PSA analyzers does not support the use of bit-1 of the status byte. Bit-1
of the status byte is always set to Off.
Chapter 4
319
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
RQS Service Request Mask
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
S1[one] Continuous Sweep
S1[one]
Continuous Sweep
Syntax
S1
;
Description
The S1 command sets the spectrum analyzer to continuous sweep
mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the spectrum analyzer takes its
next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the
trigger conditions are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by
data entries made over the remote interface.
NOTE
The functions of the command S1 are identical to the CONTS command
(page 147).
320
Chapter 4
S2 [two]
Single Sweep
Syntax
S2
;
Description
The S2 command sets the analyzer to single sweep mode. Each
subsequent time that the command S2 is sent, one sweep is started if
the trigger conditions are met.
NOTE
The functions of the S2 command are similar to the SNGLS command
(page 332).
Chapter 4
321
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
S2 [two] Single Sweep
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SADD Add Limit Line Segment
SADD
Add Limit Line Segment
Syntax
SADD
;
Description
The SADD command is used to add a limit-line segment to the current
limit line.
322
Chapter 4
SAVES
Save State
Syntax
SAVES
SP
digit
;
Description
Saves the current state of the spectrum analyzer in any of the registers
one through six.
NOTE
The functions of the SAVES command are identical to the SV command
(page 343).
Chapter 4
323
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SAVES Save State
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SDEL Delete Limit Line Segment
SDEL
Delete Limit Line Segment
Syntax
SDEL
;
Description
The SDEL command deletes the limit-line segment specified with the
SEDI command (page 326).
324
Chapter 4
SDON
Terminate Limit Line Segment
Syntax
SDON
;
Description
The SDON command is used to terminate the SEDI command
(page 326).
Chapter 4
325
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SDON Terminate Limit Line Segment
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SEDI Activate Limit Line Segment
SEDI
Activate Limit Line Segment
Syntax
SEDI
SP
integer
;
Description
The SEDI command activates the limit-line segment you identify by its
segment number in the limit-line table.
NOTE
The maximum number of limit line points that can be specified on a
PSA Series analyzer is 200.
326
Chapter 4
SENTER
Segment Entry for Frequency Limit Lines
Syntax
frequency
SENTER
SP
number
upper limit
,
number
lower limit
,
number
,
SLOPE
;
FLAT
Description
The SENTER command is used to create a complete limit-line segment.
NOTE
Although the parameters SLOPE and FLAT are accepted in the
command, they are ignored and have no effect.
Chapter 4
327
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SENTER Segment Entry for Frequency Limit Lines
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SER Serial Number
SER
Serial Number
Syntax
SER
?
;
Description
The SER command returns the analyzer serial number to the controller.
328
Chapter 4
SETDATE
Set Date
Syntax
SETDATE
SP
number
;
?
Description
The SETDATE command sets the date of the real-time clock of the
spectrum analyzer. The date takes the form YYMMDD (Year, Month,
Day)
Chapter 4
329
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SETDATE Set Date
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SETTIME Set Time
SETTIME
Set Time
Syntax
SETTIME
SP
number
;
?
Description
The SETTIME command sets the date of the real-time clock of the
spectrum analyzer. The time takes the form HHMMSS (Hour, Minute,
Second)
330
Chapter 4
SMOOTH
Smooth Trace
Syntax
SMOOTH
SP
TRA
,
number of
points
;
TRB
TRC
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data.
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Description
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the
running average.
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values (in
measurement units) of the given number of points centered on it.
Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of
decreasing resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then
the number of points is increased by one.
Smoothing decreases at the endpoints.
NOTE
Some differences may be noticed between the smoothed trace in the
legacy analyzers and the smoothed trace using the same signal in PSA
analyzers.
Chapter 4
331
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SMOOTH Smooth Trace
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SNGLS Single Sweep
SNGLS
Single Sweep
Syntax
SNGLS
;
Description
Sets the spectrum analyzer to single-sweep mode. Each time TS (take
sweep) is sent, one sweep taken as long as the trigger conditions are
met.
NOTE
The functions of the SNGLS command are identical to the S2 command
(page 321).
332
Chapter 4
SP
Frequency Span
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
SP
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
SP
UP
DN
OA
FULL
ZERO
LAST
?
Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of the
spectrum analyzer)
Chapter 4
333
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SP Frequency Span
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SP Frequency Span
8566, 8568, and 8590 Series Remote Language
SP
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of the
spectrum analyzer)
Description
Changes the total displayed frequency range symmetrically about the
center frequency.
If resolution and video bandwidths are coupled to the span width, the
bandwidths change with the span width to provide a predetermined
level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise, the sweep time
changes to maintain a calibrated display, if coupled. All of these
functions are normally coupled, unless RB (page 309), VB (page 365), or
ST (page 338) have been executed.
NOTE
Option 266 Programming Code Compatibility does not mimic the exact
coupling behavior of the legacy analyzers. Refer to your PSA User’s and
Programmer’s Reference, Volume 1 for the values used.
334
Chapter 4
SRQ
User-Defined SRQ
Syntax
SRQ
SP
digit
;
Description
The SRQ command sends a service request to the controller when the
SRQ operand fits the mask supplied with the RQS command.
NOTE
Option 266 Programming Code Compatibility does not support the
setting of bit 1 (units-key-pressed) of the status byte. Bit-1 of the status
byte is always set to Off
Chapter 4
335
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SRQ User-Defined SRQ
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SS Center Frequency Step Size
SS
Center Frequency Step Size
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
SS
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
MAN
OA
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
SS
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
336
Chapter 4
8590 Series Remote Language
SS
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
OA
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Description
The SS command specifies center frequency step size.
Chapter 4
337
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SS Center Frequency Step Size
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ST Sweep Time
ST
Sweep Time
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
ST
SP
real
S
;
MS
UP
SP
DN
US
SC
AUTO
MAN
OA
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
ST
SP
real
SC
;
MS
UP
SP
US
DN
OA
?
338
Chapter 4
8590 Series Remote Language
ST
SP
real
S
;
MS
UP
SP
DN
US
SC
AUTO
OA
?
Description
The ST command specifies the time in which the analyzer sweeps the
displayed frequency or time span.
NOTE
The OA option in the ST command behaves in the same manner as the
ST? command in that it returns the current value to the controller.
However, the OA option does not set the active function to Sweep Time.
Chapter 4
339
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
ST Sweep Time
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
STB Status Byte Query
STB
Status Byte Query
Syntax
STB
?
;
Description
The STB command returns to the controller the decimal equivalent of
the bits set in the status byte (see the RQS (page 319) and SRQ
(page 335) commands). STB is equivalent to a serial poll. The RQS and
associated bits are cleared in the same way that a serial poll would
clear them.
340
Chapter 4
STDEV
Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes
Syntax
STDEV
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Description
Returns the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.
Chapter 4
341
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
STDEV Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SUM
SUM
Syntax
SUM
Sp
TRA
,
?
;
TRB
Description
Returns the sum of all the trace values to the controller.
NOTE
The 856x series of analyzers returns display units, range (0-610)*601
points or if Trace Data Format (TDF) is set to M, it returns ASCII.
342
Chapter 4
SV
Save State
Syntax
SV
SP
digit
;
Description
Saves the current state of the spectrum analyzer in any of the registers
one through six.
NOTE
The functions of the SV command are identical to the SAVES command
(page 323).
Chapter 4
343
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
SV Save State
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
T1 [one] Free Run Trigger
T1 [one]
Free Run Trigger
Syntax
T1
;
Description
The T1 [one] command sets the analyzer sweep to free run trigger
mode.
NOTE
The functions of the T1 [one] command are identical to the TM FREE
command (page 354).
344
Chapter 4
T2 [two]
Line Trigger
Syntax
T2
;
Description
The T2 [two] command sets the analyzer sweep to line trigger mode.
NOTE
The functions of the T2 [two] command are identical to the TM LINE
command (page 354).
Chapter 4
345
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
T2 [two] Line Trigger
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
T3 [three] External Trigger
T3 [three]
External Trigger
Syntax
T3
;
Description
The T3 [three] command sets the analyzer sweep to external trigger
mode.
NOTE
The functions of the T3 [three] command are identical to the TM EXT
command (page 354).
346
Chapter 4
T4 [four]
Video Trigger
Syntax
T4
;
Description
The T4 [four] command sets the analyzer sweep to video trigger mode.
NOTE
The functions of the T4 [four] command are identical to the TM VID
command (page 354).
Chapter 4
347
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
T4 [four] Video Trigger
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TA Trace A
TA
Trace A
Syntax
TA
;
Description
Returns trace A amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller.
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to
right) as seen on the screen. Display unit values can be transferred to
the controller in any one of the four output formats as determined by
the O1 [one] (page 288), O2 [two] (page 289), O3 [three] (page 290) and
O4 [four] commands (page 291). The format of the returned data is also
affected by the TDF (Trace Data Format) (page 350) command and, if
TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command
(page 248).
348
Chapter 4
TB
Trace B
Syntax
T8
;
Description
Returns trace B amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller.
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to
right) as seen on the screen. Display unit values can be transferred to
the controller in any one of the four output formats as determined by
the O1 [one] (page 288), O2 [two] (page 289), O3 [three] (page 290) and
O4 [four] commands (page 291). The format of the returned data is also
affected by the TDF (Trace Data Format) (page 350) command and, if
TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command
(page 248).
Chapter 4
349
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TB Trace B
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TDF Trace Data Format
TDF
Trace Data Format
Syntax
TDF
P
SP
;
A
I
M
B
?
Description
Formats trace information for return to the controller.
The different trace data formats are as follows:
• Specifying M enables the 01 format and returns values in display
units, from 0 to 1001.
• Specifying P enables the 03 format and returns absolute
measurement values, such as dBm or Hz.
• Specifying A returns data as an A-block data field. The MDS
command determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes.
(See MDS (page 248))
• Specifying I returns data as an I-block data field. The MDS
command determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes.
(See MDS (page 248))
• Specifying B enables the 02 or 04 format. The MDS command
determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes
350
Chapter 4
TH
Threshold
Syntax
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
TH
SP
real
DM
;
MV
SP
UP
UV
DN
DB
OA
?
8560 Series and 8590 Series Remote Language
TH
SP
real
DM
;
MV
SP
UP
UV
DN
DB
ON
OFF
OA
?
Description
The TH command blanks signal responses below the threshold level,
similar to a base line clipper. The threshold level is nine major divisions
below the reference level, unless otherwise specified. The UP and DN
commands move the threshold 10 dB.
NOTE
The legacy analyzers all blank the display of everything below the
threshold level, but this is not the case with PSA analyzers. Using the
PEAKS (page 295) and MKPK (page 270) commands causes any values
below the threshold level to be disregarded, even though the full trace
will still be displayed. The 8560 Series supported the MKPT command
in addition to the TH command. In PSA analyzers, both the TH and the
MKPT commands will set the Marker Peak Threshold level; so if both
commands are used in a single program, incompatibility issues may be
experienced.
Chapter 4
351
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TH Threshold
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TIMEDATE Time Date
TIMEDATE
Time Date
Syntax
TIMEDATE
SP
number
;
?
Description
Sets the date and time of the real-time clock of the spectrum analyzer.
The number takes the form YYMMDDHHMMSS (Year, Month, Day,
Hour, Minute, Second).
352
Chapter 4
TITLE
Title
Syntax
TITLE
string
delimiter
char
real
string
delimiter
;
Description
The TITLE command activates the screen title mode, enabling you to
enter your own title for the screen. Valid string delimiters which must
be used to start and terminate the title are shown below.
• !
• “
• $
• %
• &
• ‘
• /
• :
• =
• \
• ~
• @
Chapter 4
353
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TITLE Title
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TM Trigger Mode
TM
Trigger Mode
Syntax
TM
FREE
SP
;
VID
LINE
EXT
?
Description
Selects a trigger mode: free, line, video, or external.
NOTE
The functions of the TM command are identical to the T1 (page 344), T2
(page 345), T3 (page 346) and T4 (page 347) commands.
354
Chapter 4
TRA
Trace Data Input and Output
Syntax
TRA
?
;
Description
The TRA command transfers Trace A amplitude values from the
analyzer to the controller. The format depends on the trace data format
selected. See the TDF command (page 350) for details on formatting.
Chapter 4
355
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRA Trace Data Input and Output
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRB Trace Data Input and Output
TRB
Trace Data Input and Output
Syntax
TRB
?
;
Description
The TRB command transfers Trace B amplitude values from the
analyzer to the controller. The format depends on the trace data format
selected. See the TDF command (page 350) for details on formatting.
356
Chapter 4
TRC
Trace Data Input and Output
Syntax
TRC
?
;
Description
The TRC command transfers Trace Amplitude values from the analyzer
to the controller. The format depends on the trace data format selected.
See the TDF command (page 350) for details on formatting.
Chapter 4
357
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRC Trace Data Input and Output
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRDSP Trace Display
TRDSP
Trace Display
Syntax
TRDSP
SP
TRA
,
ON
TRB
SP
OFF
TRC
;
1
0
?
Description
The TRDSP command turns the display of the specified trace on or off.
358
Chapter 4
TRIGPOL
Trigger Polarity
Syntax
TRIGPOL
SP
POS
;
NEG
?
Description
Selects the edge (positive or negative) of the trigger input that causes
the trigger event. TRIGPOL is available in all trigger modes.
Chapter 4
359
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRIGPOL Trigger Polarity
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRPRST Trace Preset
TRPRST
Trace Preset
Syntax
TRPRST
;
Description
Sets the trace operations to their preset values.
NOTE
Option 266 Language Code Compatibility does not do the following
stages of TRPRST as they are not supported:
• ANLGPLUS OFF
• DISPOSE ONEOS
• DISPOSE ONSWP
• DISPOSE TRMATH
• EM
360
Chapter 4
TRSTAT
Trace State
Syntax
TRSTAT
?
;
Description
The TRSTAT command returns trace states to the controller. Valid trace
states are Clear-write, Off, View, Maximum Hold, and Blank.
Table 4-18
Chapter 4
Possible Trace States
Trace State
Description
Trace State Data
Returned
Clear-write
CLRW
View
VIEW
Blank
BLANK
Off
No data is returned
Maximum Hold
MXMH
361
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TRSTAT Trace State
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
TS Take Sweep
TS
Take Sweep
Syntax
TS
;
Description
Starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is
executed.
A take sweep is required for each sweep in the single-sweep mode. TS
prevents further input from the interface bus until the sweep is
completed to allow synchronization with other instruments.
362
Chapter 4
VAVG
Video Average
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
VAVG
SP
average
length
SP
UP
;
DN
ON
OFF
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
VAVG
SP
average
length
SP
ON
;
OFF
?
Description
Enables the video-averaging function, which averages trace points to
smooth the displayed trace. When queried, the VAVG command returns
the average length.
NOTE
The functions of the VAVG command are identical to the KSG command
(page 198) and KSH command (page 200).
NOTE
There are a few differences in the way video averaging works in Option
266 Programming Code Compatibility Suite compared to the legacy
spectrum analyzers. See the following table for a summary of these
differences.
Chapter 4
363
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VAVG Video Average
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VAVG Video Average
Table 4-19
Legacy Analyzers - Video Averaging Behavioral Differences
Condition
Legacy Spectrum
Analyzers
Option 266 Programming Code
Compatibility Suite
All conditions.
8566 and 8568 only Original trace is displayed
in Trace C.
Only displays the averaged
trace. The averaged trace is
displayed in Trace A.
Average Count value
set to 0.
Cannot be set to 0.
Video averaging is turned off
if the Averaging Count is set
to 0.
Change in Average
Count setting to a
higher value.
8566 and 8568 only Continues counting from
where the previous value
left off.
Resets the counter to zero
and starts the measurement
again.
Change in average
counter setting to a
lower value.
8566 and 8568 only Updates the screen
annotation with the lower
averaging value.
If the new count value has
not been reached, continues
until the new lower count
has been reached.
If the new, lower count value
has already been reached,
the analyzer will stop and
wait until you take a new
sweep.
Averaging turned on.
Sweep time remains
unchanged.
Sweep time changes due to
the selection of the sample
detector.
Change in resolution
bandwidth, video
bandwidth, sweep
time, reference level or
attenuation.
8566 and 8568 only - In
single sweep mode, resets
counter to zero and starts
the averaging again.
Continues the measurement
without resetting the
counter.
Change in center
frequency or span.
In single sweep mode,
resets counter to zero and
starts the averaging again.
8566 and 8568 only - Also
reset the counter after
changes in RBW, VBW,
Sweep Time, Ref. Level
and Attenuation.
In single sweep mode, resets
counter to zero and starts
the averaging again. Does
not reset the counter after
changes in RBW, VBW,
Sweep Time, Ref. Level and
Attenuation.
364
Chapter 4
VB
Video Bandwidth
Syntax
8560 Series Remote Language
VB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
MAN
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
OA
?
8566 and 8568 Remote Language
VB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Chapter 4
365
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VB Video Bandwidth
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VB Video Bandwidth
8590 Series Remote Language
VB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
AUTO
OA
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Description
Specifies the video bandwidth, which is a post-detection, low-pass filter.
NOTE
Default values on the PSA analyzers may differ from the legacy
analyzers. Refer to the PSA User’s and Programmer’s Reference, Volume
1 for more details on the restrictions on the video bandwidth range.
When auto coupled, the video bandwidth is calculated as
Resolution Bandwidth x Video Resolution Bandwidth Ratio. See the
VBO command (page 367) for more details.
366
Chapter 4
VBO
Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset
Syntax
VBO
SP
1
;
-1
0
Description
The VBO command specifies the relationship between the video and
resolution bandwidths which is maintained when these bandwidths are
coupled. The bandwidths are usually coupled unless the RB command
(page 309) or VB command (page 365) have been executed.
• When 0 is selected, the ratio remains fixed at 1. That is, the
resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth are always equal
• When 1 is selected, the video bandwidth is one step higher than the
resolution bandwidth. That is, the video bandwidth:resolution
bandwidth ratio is three.
• When -1 is selected, the video bandwidth is one step lower than the
resolution bandwidth. That is, the video bandwidth:resolution
bandwidth ratio is 0.3.
Chapter 4
367
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VBO Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VBR Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
VBR
Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth
Ratio
Syntax
VBR
SP
number
SP
UP
;
DN
OA
?
Description
The VBR command specifies the relationship between the video and
resolution bandwidths that is maintained when these bandwidths are
coupled.
NOTE
Some differences may be seen between the resolution bandwidth and
video bandwidth settings when auto coupled on a PSA Series analyzer.
368
Chapter 4
VIEW
View Trace
Syntax
VIEW
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Description
Displays Trace A, trace B, or trace C, and stops taking new data into
the viewed trace.
NOTE
The functions of the VIEW command are identical to the A3 (page 91),
B3 (page 127) and KSj (page 204) commands.
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC
corresponds to Trace 3.
Chapter 4
369
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VIEW View Trace
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
VTL Video Trigger Level
VTL
Video Trigger Level
Syntax
VTL
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
SP
UP
DBMV
DN
DBUV
MV
UV
V
MW
UW
W
DM
?
Description
The VTL command sets the signal level that triggers a sweep.
370
Chapter 4
XCH
Exchange
Syntax
XCH
SP
TRA
,
TRA
TRB
TRB
TRC
TRC
;
Description
The XCH command exchanges the contents of the source and
destination traces. The traces are analyzed and adjusted to fit the
number of display points on the screen.
NOTE
The functions of the XCH TRA,TRB command are identical to the AXB
(page 124) and EX (page 171) commands.
The functions of the XCH TRB,TRC command are identical to the BXC
(page 133) and KSi (page 203) commands.
Chapter 4
371
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
XCH Exchange
Programming Commands
Programming Commands
XCH Exchange
372
Chapter 4
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
373
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
SCPI Language Basics
This section is not intended to teach you everything about the SCPI
(Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) programming
language. The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide that level of
detailed information.
Topics covered in this chapter include:
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
• “Creating Valid Commands” on page 374
• “Command Keywords and Syntax” on page 374
• “Special Characters in Commands” on page 375
• “Parameters in Commands” on page 377
• “Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line” on page 379
For more information refer to:
IEEE Standard 488.1-1987, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for
Programmable Instrumentation. New York, NY, 1998.
IEEE Standard 488.2-1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats,
Protocols and Comment Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE
Std488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1998.
Command Keywords and Syntax
A typical command is made up of keywords set off by colons. The
keywords are followed by parameters that can be followed by optional
units.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1.5 MHZ
The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case
letters. In the documentation, upper case letters indicate the short form
of the keyword. The lower case letters, indicate the long form of the
keyword. Either form may be used in the command.
Example: Sens:Freq:Star 1.5 mhz
is the same as SENSE:FREQ:start 1.5 MHz
NOTE
The command SENS:FREQU:STAR is not valid because FREQU is neither
the short, nor the long form of the command. Only the short and long
forms of the keywords are allowed in valid commands.
Creating Valid Commands
Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different
ways of writing a particular command. These are examples of valid
374
Chapter 5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
commands for a given command syntax:
Command Syntax
Sample Valid Commands
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] <freq>
The following sample commands are all
identical. They will all cause the same result.
• Sense:Band:Res 1700
• BANDWIDTH:RESOLUTION 1.7e3
• sens:band 1.7KHZ
• band 1.7kHz
• bandwidth:RES 1.7e3Hz
• MEAS:SPEC?
MEASure:SPECtrum[n]?
• Meas:spec?
• meas:spec3?
The number 3 in the last meas example causes
it to return different results then the commands
above it. See the command description for more
information.
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle
• DET:FUNC neg
INITiate:CONTinuous ON|OFF|1|0
The sample commands below are identical.
• Detector:Func Pos
• INIT:CONT ON
• init:continuous 1
Special Characters in Commands
Special
Character
|
Meaning
A vertical stroke between
parameters indicates
alternative choices. The
effect of the command is
different depending on
which parameter is
selected.
Example
Command:
TRIGger:SOURce
EXTernal|INTernal|LINE
The choices are external,
internal, and line.
Ex: TRIG:SOURCE INT
is one possible command
choice.
Chapter 5
375
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
• SENS:band 1.7E3Hz
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
Special
Character
Meaning
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
A vertical stroke between
keywords indicates
identical effects exist for
both keywords. The
command functions the
same for either keyword.
Only one of these keywords
is used at a time.
[]
<>
Example
Command:
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:
OFFSet
Two identical commands are:
Ex1: SENSE:BWIDTH:OFFSET
Ex2: SENSE:BAND:OFFSET
keywords in square
brackets are optional
when composing the
command. These implied
keywords will be executed
even if they are omitted.
Command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolu
tion]:AUTO
Angle brackets around a
word, or words, indicates
they are not to be used
literally in the command.
They represent the needed
item.
Command:
SENS:FREQ <freq>
The following commands are
all valid and have identical
effects:
Ex1: bandwidth:auto
Ex2: band:resolution:auto
Ex3: sense:bandwidth:auto
In this command example the
word <freq> should be
replaced by an actual
frequency.
Ex: SENS:FREQ 9.7MHz.
{}
376
Parameters in braces can
optionally be used in the
command either not at all,
once, or several times.
Command:
MEASure:BW <freq>{,level}
A valid command is:
meas:BW 6 MHz, 3dB, 60dB
Chapter 5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
Parameters in Commands
There are four basic types of parameters: booleans, keywords, variables
and arbitrary block program data.
OFF|ON|0|1
(Boolean)
This is a two state boolean-type parameter. The
numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF. Any numeric
value other than 0 is equivalent to ON. The numeric
values of 0 or 1 are commonly used in the command
instead of OFF or ON. Queries of the parameter always
return a numeric value of 0 or 1.
The keywords that are allowed for a particular
command are defined in the command syntax
description.
Units
Numeric variables may include units. The valid units
for a command depend on the variable type being used.
See the following variable descriptions. The indicated
default units will be used if no units are sent. Units can
follow the numerical value with, or without, a space.
Variable
A variable can be entered in exponential format as well
as standard numeric format. The appropriate range of
the variable and its optional units are defined in the
command description.
The following keywords may also be used in commands,
but not all commands allow keyword variables.
• DEFault - resets the parameter to its default value.
• UP - increments the parameter.
• DOWN - decrements the parameter.
• MINimum - sets the parameter to the smallest
possible value.
• MAXimum - sets the parameter to the largest
possible value.
The numeric value for the function’s MINimum,
MAXimum, or DEFault can be queried by adding the
keyword to the command in its query form. The
keyword must be entered following the question mark.
Example query: SENSE:FREQ:CENTER? MAX
Variable Parameters
<integer>
is an integer value with no units.
<real>
Is a floating point number with no units.
<freq>
Chapter 5
377
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
keyword
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
<bandwidth>
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
<time>
<seconds>
Is a positive rational number followed by optional units.
The default unit is Hertz. Acceptable units include: Hz,
kHz, MHz, GHz.
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The
default units are seconds. Acceptable units include: ks,
s, ms, us, ns.
<voltage>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The
default units are Volts. Acceptable units include: V, mV,
uV, nV
<current>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The
default units are Amperes. Acceptable units include: A,
mA, uA, nA.
<power>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The
default units are W. Acceptable units include: mAW,
kW, W, mW, uW, nW, pW.
<ampl>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The
default units are dBm. Acceptable units include: dBm,
dBmV, dBuV.
<rel_power>
<rel_ampl>
<percent>
<angle>
<degrees>
<string>
Is a positive rational number followed by optional units.
The default units are dB. Acceptable units include: dB.
Is a rational number between 0 and 100. You can either
use no units or use PCT.
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The
default units are degrees. Acceptable units include:
DEG, RAD.
Is a series of alpha numeric characters.
<bit_pattern> Specifies a series of bits rather than a numeric value.
The bit series is the binary representation of a numeric
value. There are no units.
Bit patterns are most often specified as hexadecimal
numbers, though octal, binary or decimal numbers may
also be used. In the SCPI language these numbers are
specified as:
• Hexadecimal, #Hdddd or #hdddd where ‘d’
represents a hexadecimal digit 0 to 9 and ‘a’ to ‘f ’. So
#h14 can be used instead of the decimal number 20.
• Octal, #Odddddd or #odddddd where ‘d’ represents
an octal digit 0 to 7. So #o24 can be used instead of
the decimal number 20.
• Binary, #Bdddddddddddddddd or
#bdddddddddddddddd where ‘d’ represents a 1 or 0.
378
Chapter 5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
So #b10100 can be used instead of the decimal
number 20.
Block Program Data
Some parameters consist of a block of data. There are a few standard
types of block data. Arbitrary blocks of program data can also be used.
<trace>
Is an array of rational numbers corresponding to
displayed trace data. See FORMat:DATA for
information about available data formats.
<arbitrary block data> Consists of a block of data bytes. The first
information sent in the block is an ASCII header
beginning with #. The block is terminated with a
semi-colon. The header can be used to determine how
many bytes are in the data block. There are no units.
(You will not get block data if your data type is ASCII,
using FORMat:DATA ASCII command. Your data will be
comma separated ASCII values.
Block data example: suppose the header is #512320.
• The first digit in the header (5) tells you how many
additional digits/bytes there are in the header.
• The 12320 means 12 thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data
bytes follow the header.
• Divide this number of bytes by your current data
format (bytes/data point), either 8 (for real,64), or 4
(for real,32). For this example, if you’re using real64
then there are 1540 points in the block.
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
Multiple commands can be written on the same line, reducing your code
space requirement. To do this:
• Commands must be separated with a semicolon (;).
• If the commands are in different subsystems, the key word for the
new subsystem must be preceded by a colon (:).
• If the commands are in the same subsystem, the full hierarchy of the
command key words need not be included. The second command can
start at the same key word level as the command that was just
executed.
SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax
All binary trace and response data is terminated with <NL><END>, as
Chapter 5
379
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
A SCPI command often refers to a block of current trace
data with a variable name such as: Trace1, TRACE2, or
trace3, depending on which trace is being accessed.
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
defined in Section 8.5 of IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard
Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with
ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992. (Although one intent
of SCPI is to be interface independent, <END> is only defined for IEEE
488 operation.)
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
The following are some examples of good and bad commands. The
examples are created from a theoretical instrument with the simple set
of commands indicated below:
[:SENSe]
:POWer
[:RF]
:ATTenuation 40dB
:TRIGger
[:SEQuence]
:EXTernal [1]
:SLOPe
POSitive
[:SENSe]
:FREQuency
:STARt
:POWer
[:RF]
:MIXer
:RANGe
[:UPPer]
Bad Command
Good Command
PWR:ATT 40dB
POW:ATT 40dB
The short form of POWER is POW, not PWR.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;MIX:RANG
-20dBm
FREQ:STAR
30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG -20dBm
The MIX:RANG command is in the same :SENSE subsystem as FREQ, but
executing the FREQ command puts you back at the SENSE level. You must
specify POW to get to the MIX:RANG command.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX RANG
-20dBm
FREQ:STAR
30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG -20dBm
MIX and RANG require a colon to separate them.
:POW:ATT 40dB;TRIG:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:POW:ATT 40dB;:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:FREQ:STAR is in the :SENSE subsystem, not the :TRIGGER subsystem.
:POW:ATT?:FREQ:STAR?
380
:POW:ATT?;:FREQ:STAR?
Chapter 5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
Bad Command
Good Command
:POW and FREQ are within the same :SENSE subsystem, but they are two
separate commands, so they should be separated with a semicolon, not a
colon.
:POW:ATT -5dB;:FREQ:STAR
10MHz
:POW:ATT 5dB;:FREQ:STAR
10MHz
Attenuation cannot be a negative value.
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
Chapter 5
381
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
382
Chapter 5
Index
Numerics
8-bit bytes, 289, 291
B
B minus display line, 129
B1, 125
B2, 126
B3, 127
B4, 128
bandwidth
channel power, 143
marker, 257
occupied power, 292
power, 301
resolution, 309
video, 365
video coupling offset, 367
bit_pattern parameter
(variables), 378
BL, 129
BLANK, 130
blank
trace C, 206
blank trace, 92, 128, 130
block data
arbitrary, 379
identifying block size, 379
parsing output, 379
BML, 131
boolean parameter (commands),
377
BTC, 132
BXC, 133
bytes, 289, 291, 340
C
C1, 134
C2, 135
CA, 136
CAL, 137
calibration, 137
carrier on power, 138
CARRON, 138
center frequency, 139
marker, 164, 258
step size, 336
CF, 139
CHANNEL, 140
channel power, 141, 142
bandwidth, 143
channel selection, 140
CHANPWR, 141
Chapter 5, “A Brief Introduction
to the SCPI Language,”on
page 373, 45
Chapter 5, A Brief Introduction to
the SCPI Language,” on page
371, 45
Chapter 6 , “A Brief Introduction
to the SCPI Language,” on
page 247, 45
character EOI, 87
characters, 86
Choose Option key, 35
CHP, 142
CHPWRBW, 143
CISPR, 303, 304
clear
average, 144
status byte, 146
write, 89, 125, 145
Clear Command Error Log, 44
CLRAVG, 144
CLRW, 145
CLS, 146
Cmd Error Log, 44
command
mnemonic, 86
terminators, 86
Command Err, 43
commands
383
Index
A
A minus B
into A, 112, 135
off, 134
plus display line, 113
A plus B
to A, 116, 193
A1, 89
A2, 90
A3, 91
A4, 92
absolute amplitude units, 119
AC coupling, 183
AC/DC, 182, 183
ACP, 93
ACPALPHA, 94
ACPALTCH, 95
ACPBRPER, 96
ACPBRWID, 97
ACPBW, 98
ACPCOMPUTE, 99
ACPFRQWT, 100
ACPLOWER, 101
ACPMAX, 102
ACPMEAS, 103
ACPMSTATE, 104
ACPPAR, 105
ACPPWRTX, 106
ACPRSLTS, 107
ACPSP, 108
ACPT, 109
ACPUPPER, 110
activate limit line segment, 326
activate marker, 256
active license key, 35
how to locate, 35
add limit line segment, 322
address
display, 154
adjacent channel power, 93
alpha weighting, 94
alternate channels, 95
auto, 105
bandwidth, 98
burst period, 96
burst width, 97
channel spacing, 108
compute, 99
frequency weighting, 100
lower, 101
manual, 105
maximum, 102
measure, 103
measurement results, 107
measurement state, 104
T weighting, 109
total power transmitted, 106
upper, 110
ADJALL, 111
Agilent Technologies URL, 2
alpha weighting, 94
AMB, 112
AMBPL, 113
amplitude
in dBm, 188
in dBmV, 190
in dBuv, 192
in volts, 194
amplitude marker, 255
amplitude units, 87, 119
analyzer command, 87
angle parameter (variables), 378
ANNOT, 115
annotation, 115
off, 215
on, 216
output trace, 294
APB, 116
arbitrary block data, 379
AT, 117
attenuation, 117
coupling, 136
AUNITS, 119
AUTO, 121
auto couple, 121, 123
AUTOCPL, 123
average
video, 363
AXB, 124
Index
Index
boolean parameter, 377
keyword parameter, 377
multiple on a line, 379
parameters, 377
syntax, 374
termination, IEEE, 380
units parameter, 377
valid commands, 374
variable parameter, 377
variable parameter keywords,
377
configure remote language, 40
continuous sweep, 147, 320
CONTS, 147
correction factors on, 148
CORREK, 148
counter
marker, 262
COUPLE, 149
couple
attenuation, 136
auto, 121, 123
frequency
step size, 151
input, 149
resolution bandwidth, 150
sweep time, 152
video bandwidth, 153
coupling
AC/DC, 182, 183
video bandwidth
offset, 367
CR, 150
CS, 151
CT, 152
current units, 87
CV, 153
D
DA, 154
data
arbitrary blocks, 379
data byte, 87
data byte EOI, 87
data entry
hold, 181
data format
display units, 288
one 8-bit byte, 291
real amplitude units, 290
trace, 350
two 8-bit bytes, 289
date, 352
set, 329
DC coupling, 182
degree parameter (variables), 378
delay
384
sweep, 161
delete
current limit line, 232
limit line segment, 324
limit line table, 228
deleting an
application/personality, 30
delimiter, 87
DELMKBW, 155
delta marker, 242, 259
occupied power bandwidth, 155
step size, 165
delta value
limit line, 226
DET, 156
detection, 303, 304
mode, 156
negative peak, 195
normal, 189
positive peak, 191
sample, 197
digit, 87
display
address, 154
frequency, 174
limit line, 229
line, 158
line enable, 160
line off, 222
off, 199
on, 201
display trace, 358
DL, 158
DLE, 160
DLYSWP, 161
documentation, 48
DONE, 162
dotted lines
optional path, 86
E
E1, 163
E2, 164
E3, 165
E4, 166
EDITDONE, 167
EDITLIML, 168
elapsed time, 170
EMC detection, 303, 304
EMI peak detection, 303, 304
enable
display line, 160
limit line testing, 234
end-of-sweep SRQ, 306
ERR, 169
error, 169
errors
clearing, 44
displaying, 43
storing, 44
ET, 170
EX, 171
exchange traces, 371
A and B, 124, 171
B and C, 133, 203
excursion
marker peak, 272
extend analyzer reference level,
202
external
preamplifier gain, 299
trigger, 219, 346
trigger mode, 354
F
FA, 172
fast preselector peak, 176
fast preset, 217
FB, 173
FDSP, 174
FOFFSET, 175
format
display units, 288
one 8-bit byte, 291
real amplitude units, 290
trace data, 350
two 8-bit bytes, 289
FPKA, 176
free run trigger, 344
free trigger mode, 354
FREF, 177
frequency
center, 139
display off, 174
limit line, 227
limit line segment entry, 327
marker, 261
marker readout, 273
offset, 175, 218
reference, 177
segment entry, 327
span, 333
start, 172
stop, 173
units, 87
frequency parameter (variables),
378
FS, 178
full span, 178
G
gain
external preamplifier, 299
getting started, 26
Index
GRAT, 180
graticule, 180
off, 211
on, 213
I
I1, 182
I2, 183
ID, 184
identify, 184
IEEE command termination, 380
IF adjustment, 111
illegal command SRQ, 305
impedance
units, 87
input
attenuation, 117
K
keyword parameter (commands),
377
KS,, 186
KS=, 187
KSA, 188
KSa, 189
KSB, 190
KSb, 191
KSC, 192
KSc, 193
KSD, 194
KSd, 195
KSE, 196
KSe, 197
KSG, 198
KSg, 199
KSH, 200
KSh, 201
KSI, 202
KSi, 203
KSj, 204
KSK, 205
KSk, 206
KSL, 207
KSl, 208
KSM, 209
KSm, 211
KSN, 212
KSn, 213
KSO, 214
KSo, 215
KSp, 216
KST, 217
KSV, 218
KSx, 219
KSy, 220
KSZ, 221
L
L0, 222
level
mixer, 283
reference, 315
reference offset, 318
video trigger, 370
LG, 224
license key
obtaining and installing, 34
LIMD, 226
LIMF, 227
LIMIDEL, 228
LIMIDESP, 229
LIMIFAIL, 230
LIMIFT, 231
LIMIPURGE, 232
LIMIREL, 233
limit
lower amplitude, 235
middle amplitude, 236
upper amplitude, 237
limit line
activate segment, 326
add segment, 322
delete current, 232
delete segment, 324
delete table, 228
delta value, 226
display, 229
edit, 168
enable testing, 234
end of edit, 167
frequency, 231
frequency value, 227
relative, 233
segment activate, 326
segment entry for frequency
limit line, 327
segment terminate, 325
terminate segment, 325
testing, 234
time, 231
limitations, 26
commands supported, 27
predefined functions, 27
user-defined functions, 27
LIMITEST, 234
limits failed, 230
LIML, 235
LIMM, 236
LIMU, 237
line trigger, 345
line trigger mode, 354
linear scale, 238
LN, 238
LO adjustment, 111
LO and IF adjustment, 111
loading an
application/personality, 30
logarithmic scale, 224
lower adjacent channel power,
101
lower-limit amplitude, 235
385
Index
H
hardware broken SRQ, 307
hardware requirements, 28
HD, 181
hints, 82
compatibility, 82
instrument presets, 83
overloading, 83
SCPI language, 83
speed, 82
sweep times, 82
synchronization, 82, 83
time out, 82
hold
data entry, 181
maximum, 287
minimum, 253
HP8560E/EC remote language,
40
HP8561E/EC remote language,
40
HP8562E/EC remote language,
40
HP8563E/EC remote language,
40
HP8564E/EC remote language,
40
HP8565E/EC remote language,
40
HP8566B remote language, 41
HP8568B remote language, 41
HP8590L remote language, 41
HP8591E remote language, 41
HP8592L remote language, 41
HP8593E remote language, 41
HP8594E remote language, 42
HP8594EL remote language, 42
HP8595E remote language, 42
HP8596E remote language, 42
coupling, 149
input attenuation, 44
Install Now key, 35
Installing and Obtaining a license
key, 34
installing measurement
personalities, 30
instrument preset, 185
integer variable (variables), 377
IP, 185
Index
Index
lsb length, 87
LSPAN, 239
M
M1, 240
M2, 241
M3, 242
M4, 244
MA, 245
marker
activate, 256
amplitude, 255
amplitude output, 245
bandwidth, 257
center frequency, 164, 258
counter, 262
counter resolution, 263
delta, 242, 259
delta step size, 165
frequency, 261
frequency counter off, 246
frequency counter on, 247
frequency output, 252
minimum, 212, 264
next peak, 205
noise, 266
noise off, 207
noise on, 209
normal, 241, 265
occupied power bandwidth, 155
off, 240, 268
peak, 163, 270
peak excursion, 272
position, 269
readout, 273
reference level, 166
span, 214
step size, 165, 277
table, 279
threshold, 271
time, 278
to span, 276
trace, 280
track, 281
track off, 285
track on, 286
type, 282
zoom, 244
marker amplitude, 255
marker amplitude output, 245
marker bandwidth, 257
marker counter, 262
marker counter resolution, 187,
263
marker delta, 259
marker frequency, 261
marker frequency counter off, 246
386
marker frequency counter on, 247
marker frequency output, 252
marker minimum, 212, 264
marker noise, 266
marker noise off, 207
marker noise on, 209
marker normal, 241, 265
marker off, 240, 268
marker peak, 270
marker peak excursion, 272
marker position, 269
marker readout, 273
marker readout in frequency, 273
marker span, 214
marker step size, 277
marker table, 279
marker threshold, 271
marker time, 278
marker to center frequency, 164,
258
marker to next peak, 205
marker to reference level, 166,
275
marker to span, 276
marker trace, 280
marker track, 281
marker track off, 285
marker track on, 286
marker type, 282
max mixer level, 44
maximum adjacent channel
power, 102
maximum hold, 90, 126, 287
MC0, 246
MC1, 247
MDS, 248
MEAN, 249
mean
power measurement, 250
trace, 249
mean power measurement, 250
MEANPWR, 250
MEASOFF, 251
measurement
data size, 248
off, 251
MF, 252
middle-amplitude
limit, 236
MINH, 253
minimum
hold, 253
marker, 212, 264
x position, 254
MINPOS, 254
missing options, 30
mixer level, 186, 283
MKA, 255
MKACT, 256
MKBW, 257
MKCF, 258
MKD, 259
MKF, 261
MKFC, 262
MKFCR, 263
MKMIN, 264
MKN, 265
MKNOISE, 266
MKOFF, 268
MKP, 269
MKPK, 270
MKPT, 271
MKPX, 272
MKREAD, 273
MKRL, 275
MKSP, 276
MKSS, 277
MKT, 278
MKTBL, 279
MKTRACE, 280
MKTRACK, 281
MKTYPE, 282
ML, 283
mnemonic
command, 86
msb length, 87
MT0, 285
MT1, 286
MXMH, 287
N
negative peak detection, 195
noise
marker, 266
marker off, 207
marker on, 209
measurement, 266
signal to noise ratio, 266
normal
detection, 189
marker, 241, 265
number, 87
O
O1, 288
O2, 289
O3, 290
O4, 291
OCCUP, 292
occupied power bandwidth, 292
occupied power bandwidth within
delta marker, 155
offset
frequency, 175, 218
Index
preselector peak, 176, 298
preset
fast, 217
trace, 360
preset instrument, 185
previous span, 239
PRINT, 300
print, 300
programming
command parameters, 377
command syntax, 374
SCPI basics, 374
valid commands, 374
PWRBW, 301
PWRUPTIME, 302
P
parameter (variables), 377
parameters (commands), 377
parameters, variable, 377
peak
excursion marker, 272
fast preselector, 176
marker, 163, 270
negative peak detection, 195
position, 296
preselector, 298
PEAKS, 295
percent occupied power
bandwidth, 292
percent parameter (variables),
378
personality options not in
instrument, 30
phase parameter (variables), 378
PKPOS, 296
PLOT, 297
polarity
trigger, 359
position
minimum x, 254
positive peak detection, 191
power
bandwidth, 301
carrier on, 138
channel, 141, 142
percent occupied bandwidth,
292
up time, 302
power measurement
mean, 250
power parameter (variables), 378
power up time, 302
PP, 298
PREAMPG, 299
preamplifier
external gain, 299
Q
quasi-peak detection, 303, 304
query
status byte, 340
R
R1, 305
R2, 306
R3, 307
R4, 308
ratio
VBW/RBW, 368
RB, 150, 309
RBR, 311
RBW to span ratio, 311
RBW/VBW, 44
RC, 312
readout
marker, 273
recall last state, 312
recommended path, 86
reference
frequency, 177
reference level, 315
marker, 275
reference level marker, 166
reference level offset, 221, 318
register 7
saving, 44
relative limit lines, 233
relative power parameter
(variables), 378
remote language
configuring, 40
HP8560E/EC, 40
HP8561E/EC, 40
HP8562E/EC, 40
HP8563E/EC, 40
HP8564E/EC, 40
HP8565E/EC, 40
HP8566B, 41
HP8568B, 41
HP8590L, 41
HP8591E, 41
HP8592L, 41
HP8593E, 41
HP8594E, 42
HP8594L, 42
HP8595E, 42
HP8596E, 42
SCPI, 40, 45
repeating syntax element, 86
reserved words, 86
resolution
marker counter, 187, 263
resolution bandwidth, 309, 311
coupling, 150
vide bandwidth ratio, 368
resolution bandwidth ratio, 311
results data, identifying block
size, 379
returning or storing trace values,
355, 356, 357
REV, 314
revision, 314
RL, 315
RMS, 317
ROFFSET, 318
root mean square value, 317
RQS, 319
S
S1, 320
S2, 321
SADD, 322
sample detection, 197
save state, 343
saving analyzer state, 293
saving register 7, 44
scale
linear, 238
logarithmic, 224
SCPI language, 40, 45
basic info, 374
command parameters, 377
command syntax, 374
keyword parameters, 377
valid commands, 374
screen title, 353
display, 353
SDEL, 324
SDON, 325
secondary keywords, 86
SEDI, 326
segment entry for frequency limit
lines, 327
select frequency line, 231
select time limit line, 231
387
Index
reference level, 221, 318
video bandwidth
coupling, 367
OL, 293
Q1, 304
options
loading/deleting, 30
options not in instrument
memory, 30
OT, 294
output data, identifying block
size, 379
output learn string, 293
output termination, 87
output trace annotations, 294
Index
Index
selection
channel, 140
SENTER, 327
SER, 328
serial number, 328
service request mask, 319
set
date, 329
RF coupling to AC, 183
RF coupling to DC, 182
time, 330
SETDATE, 329
SETTIME, 330
setting the marker counter
resolution, 187
shipment
verification list, 48
signal-to-noise ratio, 266
single sweep, 321, 332
SMOOTH, 331
smooth trace, 331
SNGLS, 332
softkeys
Atten Offset, 44
Clear Command Error Log, 44
Cmd Error Log, 44
Command Err, 43
Config Remote Lang, 40
HP8560E/EC, 40
HP8561E/EC, 40
HP8562E/EC, 40
HP8563E/EC, 40
HP8564E/EC, 40
HP8565E/EC, 40
HP8566B, 41
HP8568B, 41
HP8590L, 41
HP8591E, 41
HP8592L, 41
HP8593E, 41
HP8594E, 42
HP8594L, 42
HP8595E, 42
HP8596E, 42
Language, 40
Limit RBW/VBW, 44
Save Reg 7, 44
SCPI, 40
SP, 333
span, 311, 333
frequency, 333
full, 178
marker, 214, 276
previous, 239
span zoom, 244
special, 86
numbers, 86
388
SPEed|DRANge|DYNamicrange
, 45
SRQ, 335
end-of-sweep, 306
hardware broken, 307
illegal command, 305
units-key-pressed, 308
user-defined, 335
SS, 336
ST, 338
standard deviation of trace
amplitudes, 341
start frequency, 172
state
recall, 312
trace, 361
status byte
clear, 146
query, 340
status byte query, 340
STB, 340
STDEV, 341
step size
center frequency, 336
marker, 277
stop frequency, 173
string parameter (variables), 378
SUM, 342
sum of traces, 342
SV, 343
sweep
continuous, 147, 320
delay, 161
single, 321, 332
take, 362
time, 338
sweep time
coupling, 152
syntax elements, 86
syntax for commands, 86
T
T weighting
adjacent channel power, 109
T1, 344
T2, 345
T3, 346
T4, 347
table
marker, 279
take sweep, 362
TDF, 350
terminate limit line segment, 325
terminators
command, 86
TH, 351
threshold, 351
marker, 271
time, 352
elapsed, 170
marker, 278
set, 330
units, 87
time date, 352
time parameter (variables), 378
TIMEDATE, 352
tips, 82
compatibility, 82
instrument presets, 83
overloading, 83
SCPI language, 83
speed, 82
sweep times, 82
synchronization, 82, 83
time out, 82
TITLE, 353
title mode, 196
titlle, 353
TM, 354
TRA, 355
trace
A plus B to A, 193
blank, 92, 130
blank trace C, 206
data input, 355, 356, 357
data output, 355, 356, 357
display, 358
exchange, 371
exchange B and C, 203
mean, 249
output annotations, 294
preset, 360
returning values, 355, 356, 357
smooth, 331
standard deviation of
amplitudes, 341
state, 361
storing values, 355, 356, 357
transfer B to C, 208
view, 91, 127
view trace C, 204
trace B minus display line, 131
trace data format, 350, 379
trace data input, 355, 356, 357
trace data input and output, 355,
356, 357
trace data output, 355, 356, 357
trace marker, 280
trace mean, 249
trace preset, 360
track marker, 281
transfer traces
B to C, 132, 208
TRB, 356
Index
TRC, 357
TRDSP, 358
trigger
external, 219, 346, 354
free, 354
free run, 344
line, 345, 354
mode, 354
polarity, 359
TV, 354
video, 220, 347, 354
video level, 370
triggering the spectrum analyzer,
354
TRIGPOL, 359
TRPRST, 360
TRSTAT, 361
TS, 362
TV trigger mode, 354
type marker, 282
V
variable parameter (commands),
377
variables
angle parameter, 378
bit_data parameter, 378
degree parameter, 378
frequency parameter, 378
integer parameter, 377
parameters, 377
percent parameter, 378
phase parameter, 378
power parameter, 378
relative power parameter, 378
string parameter, 378
time parameter, 378
voltage parameter, 378
VAVG, 363
VB, 365
VBO, 367
W
website
firmware updates, 48
Index
U
Uninstall Now, 35
uninstalling measurement
personalities, 30
units, 87
units parameter (commands), 377
units-key-pressed SRQ, 308
upper adjacent channel power,
110
upper-limit amplitude, 237
URL
Agilent Technologies, 2
firmware, 48
spectrum analyzer updates, 48
user-defined SRQ, 335
VBR, 368
VBW/RBW ratio, 368
video average, 363
video averaging
off, 200
on, 198
video bandwidth, 365
coupling, 153
coupling offset, 367
resolution bandwidth ratio, 368
video bandwidth to resolution
bandwidth ratio, 368
video trigger, 220, 347
level, 370
video trigger level, 370
video trigger mode, 354
VIEW, 369
view
mode, 91, 127
trace, 369
trace C, 204
view trace, 91, 127
view trace, trace
view, 369
voltage parameter (variables),
378
VTL, 370
X
XCH, 371
Z
Q0, 303
zoom marker, 244
389
Index
Index
390
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement